OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System V100R003C03

Commissioning Guide (U2000)
Issue Date 01 2011-10-30

HUAWEI TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD.

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 2011. All rights reserved. No part of this document may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means without prior written consent of Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Trademarks and Permissions
and other Huawei trademarks are trademarks of Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. All other trademarks and trade names mentioned in this document are the property of their respective holders.

Notice
The purchased products, services and features are stipulated by the contract made between Huawei and the customer. All or part of the products, services and features described in this document may not be within the purchase scope or the usage scope. Unless otherwise specified in the contract, all statements, information, and recommendations in this document are provided "AS IS" without warranties, guarantees or representations of any kind, either express or implied. The information in this document is subject to change without notice. Every effort has been made in the preparation of this document to ensure accuracy of the contents, but all statements, information, and recommendations in this document do not constitute the warranty of any kind, express or implied.

Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Address: Huawei Industrial Base Bantian, Longgang Shenzhen 518129 People's Republic of China http://www.huawei.com support@huawei.com

Website: Email:

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

i

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Commissioning Guide (U2000)

About This Document

About This Document
Related Versions
The following table lists the product versions related to this document. Product Name OptiX RTN 950 iManager U2000 Version V100R003C03 V100R006C00

Intended Audience
This document describes how to commission the OptiX RTN 950, including preparations before commissioning, site commissioning, and system commissioning. The intended audience of this document are: Installation and commissioning engineers

Symbol Conventions
The symbols that may be found in this document are defined as follows. Symbol Description Indicates a hazard with a high level of risk, which if not avoided, will result in death or serious injury. Indicates a hazard with a medium or low level of risk, which if not avoided, could result in minor or moderate injury. Indicates a potentially hazardous situation, which if not avoided, could result in equipment damage, data loss, performance degradation, or unexpected results.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. ii

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Commissioning Guide (U2000)

About This Document

Symbol

Description Indicates a tip that may help you solve a problem or save time. Provides additional information to emphasize or supplement important points of the main text.

General Conventions
The general conventions that may be found in this document are defined as follows. Convention Times New Roman Boldface Italic Courier New Description Normal paragraphs are in Times New Roman. Names of files, directories, folders, and users are in boldface. For example, log in as user root. Book titles are in italics. Examples of information displayed on the screen are in Courier New.

Command Conventions
The command conventions that may be found in this document are defined as follows. Convention Boldface Italic [] { x | y | ... } [ x | y | ... ] { x | y | ... }* Description The keywords of a command line are in boldface. Command arguments are in italics. Items (keywords or arguments) in brackets [ ] are optional. Optional items are grouped in braces and separated by vertical bars. One item is selected. Optional items are grouped in brackets and separated by vertical bars. One item is selected or no item is selected. Optional items are grouped in braces and separated by vertical bars. A minimum of one item or a maximum of all items can be selected. Optional items are grouped in brackets and separated by vertical bars. Several items or no item can be selected.

[ x | y | ... ]*

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

iii

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Commissioning Guide (U2000)

About This Document

GUI Conventions
The GUI conventions that may be found in this document are defined as follows. Convention Boldface > Description Buttons, menus, parameters, tabs, window, and dialog titles are in boldface. For example, click OK. Multi-level menus are in boldface and separated by the ">" signs. For example, choose File > Create > Folder.

Change History
Updates between document issues are cumulative. Therefore, the latest document issue contains all updates made in previous issues.

Updates in Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Based on Product Version V100R003C03
This document is the first release of the V100R003C03 version.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

iv

.......1 1.....................................................................................................2 Using Ladders............................2 1......................1 General Safety Precautions..........................................................................................................3 Forbidden Areas.............................................................................................................................2 Electromagnetic Exposure....................................................................................................14 1.....................8 Mechanical Safety.....................................................................7 1..................................................................................4 Operation Guide for the IF Board.............ii 1 Safety Precautions....33 Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co..........................................................4 Laser.7 1....................................6........................1.........................16 1.........30 3....................24 3 Commissioning Preparations.................................................................................................................................................................................5 Storage Batteries..........7 Working at Heights..3 Electrical Safety......................................................................................................................2 Determining the Commissioning Method.23 2..........................................................................................................27 3............11 1......................................................6......................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................1 Commissioning Process..........................................6 Radiation....................................7......................................................13 1............................................11 1...............6.........................................................13 1................................................................................................4 Checking Commissioning Conditions......................................3 1........................................................................................................................................ v ..........................................6.............1 Site Commissioning.......................................................................................................OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Commissioning Guide (U2000) Contents Contents About This Document..................2 System Commissioning..................31 3.......................................................9 Other Precautions..............5 Microwave.................20 2.....4 Environment of Flammable Gas.................................................................................................17 2 Notices for High-Risk Operations........1 Safe Usage of Optical Fibers.........................4 1............................................................3 Operation Guide for the IF Cable........................................................................33 3...........................................27 3..............4....................................................................................................................22 2..............................................2 Warning and Safety Symbols............................4.......................................................................................................................................................................26 3.........................................................................................................................................................................................................33 3.............................................................................................. Ltd......12 1..........................................................................................2 Operation Guide for the IF Jumper..................................9 1...........................19 2..........................11 1.............29 3..................1....3 Preparing Documents and Tools........................9 1.........................................................................................................1 Hoisting Heavy Objects.........1 Site Commissioning Process.......................................1 Operation Guide for the Toggle Lever Switch.................................................................................................................6........................................................................................................................................7............2 System Commissioning Process......

.....3 Configuring Site Commissioning Data by Using the Handheld Tool.......4...........................7 Configuring the IF/ODU Information of a Radio Link...........2....48 4................................OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Commissioning Guide (U2000) Contents 4 Site Commissioning...1...............................................................................................2...............................................2...82 4...................................................................54 4......73 4..51 4........................62 4.............................................................................4 Setting NE Communication Parameters.........................................2 Testing Connectivity of E1 Cables by Using the Handheld Tool....5.......................10 Creating an XPIC Workgroup.........................................2.......................................................................................................................................................1 Creating NEs by Using the Search Method.......................................2 Changing the NE ID.........1.................4 Changing the NE ID.....................................................2..................................7 Configuring Logical Boards....56 4..........7 Querying the DCN Status.........4...........63 4..................1....................................................................................2.................................................................58 4.....................................................................2 Aligning Single-Polarized Antennas..................................1 Testing Connectivity of E1 Cables by Using the Web LCT....1.....................................................................................................85 4...............................................92 5..96 5..........74 4...............................................2.................................................................5...........................60 4..................79 4....11 Setting the Hybrid/AM Attributes of the XPIC Workgroup......................... Ltd.......................1 Powering On the Equipment......................................................3 Changing the NE Name.....5 Configuring the Logical Board........4 Testing Connectivity of Cables................3 Configuring a Radio Link....................89 5 System Commissioning.......................................................................55 4..........................................5 Changing the NE Name.........2...1......................................................................................1 Configuring Networkwide Service Data...........................................79 4..................................3 Logging In to an NE..................................................3.................95 5....52 4...................................................8 Creating an IF 1+1 Protection Group.....................61 4..............................................................................2................................3...........46 4.....................3 Aligning Dual-Polarized Antennas..................................76 4.....2.....92 5....................................................................2.....................59 4..................................4......................................................................................................................................................97 5................................................................................................................................................................................................................2 Setting NE Attributes....................64 4.9 Configuring the IF/ODU Information of a Radio Link........2..........1 Main Lobe and Side Lobes.............6 Setting NE Communication Parameters............73 4.1 Connecting the Handheld Tool to the IDU..................2 Creating NEs by Using the Search Method....................................................................................................................................2 Configuring Site Commissioning Data by Using the Web LCT...........................................95 5.....3 Testing Connectivity of Network Cables.........................................................................72 4.................88 4...............................................5..............................................................35 4........................................64 4.....53 4.....................................68 4..............3..........................................................37 4..................................99 Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co...........................14 Checking Alarms............................77 4.........................66 4................12 Synchronizing NE Time....................1.............1 Connecting the Web LCT to the IDU........................4............6 Creating an IF 1+1 Protection Group.......................................................................................................................................6 Checking the Status of Radio Links.....................................................................................5 Aligning the Antennas......................................................................................................................34 4.......................................................................................................................................................................94 5...........................................................................................................................................................2.......................................................................................................2..................................................4 Checking Fiber Jumper Connection............................13 Configuring the Orderwire............................4 Checking Alarms.............................3............90 5.................................. vi .....................................1...............................

.....................................................164 A.....3 Parameter Description: NE Attribute_NE ID Change.................................................................101 5....................................1 Testing IF 1+1 Switching...........................................................................150 7...........................................................................................2........................................................................1 Testing AM Switching by Using a BER Tester..8 Configuring ATPC Attributes.....1..................................................166 A.........................................................1..............................105 5..............................................................................7 Parameter Description: Link Configuration_XPIC......................................................110 5........164 A........................................2 Testing E1 Services...............118 5..............168 A...........................6........................6......6..................................133 5.........................................1 Parameter Description: NE Searching.........................154 A Parameters Description.....................................................................5 Testing MPLS APS Protection Switching............................................6 Testing Protection Switching...1 Functions and Features........4 Parameter Description: Attribute_Changing NE IDs.................8 Parameter Description: Link Configuration_IF 1+1 Protection..............................................................................................................................................................2 Board Configurations.............................................................................2 Testing E1 Services Using PRBS........5 Testing AM Switching.............111 5...............................................122 5...183 Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co.........................................................................4 Configuration Process................................................................................................................................................................................4 Testing ERPS Switching.................................OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Commissioning Guide (U2000) Contents 5.............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................3 Testing Ethernet Services........6.......................................................................1 Testing E1 Services by Using a BER Tester..............................................................................................9 Synchronizing the NE Time..............................................140 5.......................102 5..................8 Testing the FM over a Radio Link.......................................120 5...................................9 Parameter Description: IF 1+1 Protection_Create...............................2............................148 7 Configuration Example of Service Data....................................1 Networking Diagram......................................................................................................................1.....................151 7................................................................................................140 5.................125 5...................4 Testing ATM Services...........147 6..........................................................................................................................2 Operation Interface................1..........................106 5.......................................................................................................................................2 Testing N+1 Protection Switching............................... vii ....144 6 Introduction to the Handheld Tool...................................165 A............................................................................6 Parameter Description: Link Configuration_XPIC Workgroup_Creation.............................................118 5.....................................................................................................................7 Checking the Clock Status................................................................................................................................................................... Ltd...............................................................................................108 5........................115 5....................................9 Testing 24-Hour BER.........12 Configuring Orderwire...................180 A..................................................10 Creating the Cross-Connections of Point-to-Point Services.2 Parameter Description: Login to an NE.................6 Testing Linear MSP Switching..........................1..............................................................................136 5....................3 Service Planning.............................................132 5......................122 5................................................................................3 Testing SNCP Switching........173 A..............................................................107 5.108 5...................................5 Parameter Description: NE Communication Parameter Setting.................................................................................................................................2 Testing AM Switching Without a BER Tester.................5...............................5....151 7.............................................128 5..................................152 7..........................................................................................................11 Configuring the Clock Sources.............158 A.............148 6.....160 A...............6..................................................6.......

..................205 A....................230 B................210 B............................................................................................................................1 0-9..................................................................................................201 A................................................3 F-J...............................11 Parameter Description: IF Interface_ATPC Attribute.........................................6 U-Z.........196 A...................................................................................................................................................239 Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co............12 Parameter Description: NE Time Synchronization......................16 Parameter Description: Orderwire_Advanced........................................207 B Glossary........................................... Ltd.....................................186 A....................................................................................................198 A..............................................................15 Parameter Description: Orderwire_General............................................204 A.................14 Parameter Description: Clock Source Priority Table...............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................209 B.........................................................................5 P-T...............................................224 B.................................................................................................................210 B............................219 B.......................................2 A-E..................................................................................4 K-O..............10 Parameter: Link Configuration_IF/ODU Configuration.......................... viii ...13 Parameter Description: SDH Service Configuration_Creation.......................................................................................OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Commissioning Guide (U2000) Contents A....................

high leakage current.8 Mechanical Safety This topic describes safety precautions for drilling holes. power cables. operate.6 Radiation This topic describes safety precautions for electromagnetic exposure and lasers. and routing cables.4 Environment of Flammable Gas This topic describes safety precautions for the operating environment of a device. and maintain Huawei devices.5 Storage Batteries This topic describes safety precautions for operations of storage batteries. 1. Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. 1. 1. binding signal cables. 1.2 Warning and Safety Symbols Before using the equipment.OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Commissioning Guide (U2000) 1 Safety Precautions 1 About This Chapter Safety Precautions This topic describes the safety precautions that you must follow when installing. and ESD.9 Other Precautions This topic describes safety precautions for removing and inserting boards. 1. and carrying heavy objects. 1.3 Electrical Safety This topic describes safety precautions for high voltage.1 General Safety Precautions This topic describes essential safety precautions that instruct you in the selection of measuring and testing instruments when you install. 1. operating fans. handling sharp objects. note the following warning and safety symbols on the equipment. fuses.. 1. operating. Ltd.7 Working at Heights This topic describes safety precautions for working at heights. lightning strikes. 1. and maintaining Huawei devices. 1 .

Ltd. Ensure that the grounding conductor is intact.1 General Safety Precautions This topic describes essential safety precautions that instruct you in the selection of measuring and testing instruments when you install. Before operating the device. do not operate the fixed terminal or touch the cables. Basic Installation Requirements The installation and maintenance personnel of Huawei devices must receive strict training and be familiar with the proper operation methods and safety precautions before any operation. Human Safety l l When there is a risk of a lightning strike. When removing the device. and "DANGER" marks in this document do not cover all the safety precautions that must be followed. The safety precautions provided in the documents are in addition/supplementary to the local laws and regulations. and maintaining a device. and maintain a device.. unplug the AC power connector. always connect the grounding facilities first. Local Laws and Regulations When operating a device. l l l l When installing the device.OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Commissioning Guide (U2000) 1 Safety Precautions 1. and maintain Huawei devices. check the electrical connections of the device. always disconnect the grounding facilities last. Do not use the fixed terminal or touch the terminal or antenna connector. They are supplements to the safety precautions. and to troubleshoot and maintain the device. When there is risk of a lightning strike. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. Only certified professionals are permitted to remove the safety facilities. operate. follow the marks on the device and all the safety precautions in this document when installing. All Safety Precautions To ensure the safety of humans and a device. and ensure that the device is properly grounded. operate. l l l l Only trained and qualified personnel are permitted to install. Only the personnel authenticated or authorized by Huawei are permitted to replace or change the device or parts of the device (including software). The device must be connected to the PGND permanently. operating. The "CAUTION". Grounding Requirements The grounding requirements are applicable to the device that needs to be grounded. "WARNING". always comply with the local laws and regulations. 2 Issue 01 (2011-10-30) . The operating personnel must immediately report the faults or errors that may cause safety problems to the person in charge. Do not operate the device in the absence of a suitably installed grounding conductor.

LASER RADIATION DO NOT VIEW DIRECTLY WITH OPTICAL INSTRUMENTS CLASS 1M LASER PRODUCT Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. Otherwise. such as jewelry and watches. In case of fire. Before operating the device. you may cause damage to the board.OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Commissioning Guide (U2000) NOTE 1 Safety Precautions The preceding requirements apply to wireless fixed station terminals. human eyes may be hurt by laser beams. Otherwise. In addition. CLASS 1 LASER PRODUCT This symbol is for the laser class. note the following warning and safety symbols on the equipment. escape from the building or site where the device is located and press the fire alarm bell or dial the telephone number for fire alarms.. ESD gloves. 1. use a tool to tighten the screws firmly. l Device Safety l l l l Before any operation. When the system is working.2 Warning and Safety Symbols Before using the equipment. clean up the packing materials. After installing the device. 3 . and an ESD wrist strap. Otherwise. such as on a wall or in a rack. Ltd. Avoid direct exposure to the laser beams. Table 1-1 Warning and safety symbols of the OptiX RTN 950 Symbol Indication This symbol is for ESD protection. Table 1-1 lists the warning and safety symbols of the OptiX RTN 950 and their meanings. Do not look into optical ports without eye protection. if required. l l l To avoid electric shocks. A notice with this symbol indicates the class of the laser. ensure that the ventilation hole is not blocked. you need to get off the conductive objects. it may damage you eyes or skin. to prevent electric shock and burn. do not connect safety extra-low voltage (SELV) circuits to telephone-network voltage (TNV) circuits. install the device firmly on the ground or other rigid objects. wear an ESD protective coat. When installing the front panel. Do not enter the burning building again in any situation. A notice with this symbol indicates that you should wear an ES wrist strap or glove when you touch a board.

power cables. high leakage current. Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. ATTENTION 警告 CLEAN PERIODICALLY定期清洗 A notice with this symbol indicates that the air filter should be cleaned periodically. 严禁在风扇高速旋转时接触叶片 DON'T TOUCH THE FAN LEAVES BEFORE THEY SLOW DOWN ! This symbol is for fan safety. DANGER Do not perform operations on high voltage. 1. fuses. High Voltage DANGER l A high-voltage power supply provides power for device operations. Thunderstorm The requirements apply only to wireless base stations or devices with antennas and feeders.OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Commissioning Guide (U2000) 1 Safety Precautions Symbol Indication A notice with this symbol indicates where the subrack is grounded. or backstays in stormy weather conditions. A notice with this symbol indicates that the fan leaves should not be touched when the fan is rotating.3 Electrical Safety This topic describes safety precautions for high voltage. 4 . l Unspecified or unauthorized high voltage operations could result in fire or electric shock. lightning strikes. AC power. towers. Direct human contact with the high voltage power supply or human contact through damp objects can be fatal. or both. Ltd. and ESD..

Device with Power On DANGER Installing or removing a device is prohibited if the device is on. Short Circuits When installing and maintaining devices. ground the device. Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. l l Before installing or removing power cables. DANGER Do not install or remove the power cables of the equipment when it is powered on. place and use the associated tools and instruments in accordance with regulations to avoid short-circuits caused by metal objects. you must connect the PGND terminal on the shell to the ground before connecting the device to an A/C input power supply. Power Cables DANGER Do not install or remove the power cable with a live line. you must ensure that the label on the power cable is correct.. Transient contact between the core of the power cable and the conductor may generate electric arc or spark. Ltd. Otherwise. This is to prevent the electric shock caused by leakage current of the device. Before connecting a power cable. which may cause fire or eye injury. 5 .OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Commissioning Guide (U2000) 1 Safety Precautions High Leakage Current WARNING Before powering on a device. you must power off the device. If a high leakage current mark is labeled near the power connector of the device. the safety of humans and the device cannot be ensured.

. do not place the tool on the ventilation plate of the subrack. clothing friction. Ltd. Such static electromagnetic effects can remain for an appreciable time. Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. Fuse WARNING If the fuse on a device blows. l The human body can generate static electromagnetic fields in the following situations: physical movement. replace the fuse with a fuse of the same type and specifications to ensure safe operation of the device. friction between shoes and the ground. The ESD wrist strap can prevent the electrostatic-sensitive components from being damaged by the static electricity in the human body. Electrostatic Discharge CAUTION The static electricity generated by the human body may damage the electrostatic sensitive components on the board. such as the large-scale integrated circuit (LSI). or ASICs. plastics in the hand. Before operating a device. circuit boards. CAUTION Prevent any screws from dropping into the subrack or chassis to avoid short-circuits. wear an ESD wrist strap that is properly grounded.OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Commissioning Guide (U2000) 1 Safety Precautions CAUTION To avoid short-circuits when using a tool (such as a screwdriver). l Figure 1-1 shows the method of wearing an ESD wrist strap. 6 .

During operation. The electrolyte may corrode metal parts and the circuit boards. Misoperations may cause a short-circuit.. 1. and prevent the electrolyte from overflowing or leakage. and ultimately damage the circuit boards. If the electrolyte overflows.OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Commissioning Guide (U2000) 1 Safety Precautions Figure 1-1 Wearing an ESD wrist strap 1. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. l l l Incorrect operations of storage batteries cause hazards. you must read the safety precautions carefully and be familiar with the method of connecting a storage battery. Operating an electronic device in an environment of flammable gas causes a severe hazard. which leads to human injuries. Ltd.5 Storage Batteries This topic describes safety precautions for operations of storage batteries. DANGER Do not place or operate devices in an environment of flammable or explosive air or gas. A storage battery contains a great deal of energy. it causes potential hazards to the device. DANGER Before operating a storage battery. 7 Issue 01 (2011-10-30) . prevent any shortcircuit.4 Environment of Flammable Gas This topic describes safety precautions for the operating environment of a device.

Hazardous Gas CAUTION Do not use any unsealed lead-acid storage battery. which may cause fire or device erosion. note the following points before installing or maintaining the storage battery: l l l l l Use special insulation tools. ensure that the storage battery is disconnected from the power supply that charges the storage battery. ventilation and fireproofing measures must be taken at the sites where lead-acid storage batteries are placed. and the electrolyte may overflow. Avoid any short-circuit of batteries caused by metal objects.. the instantaneous high current caused by a short-circuit emits a great deal of energy. When the temperature of the battery is higher than 60°C. Leaning or reversing the storage battery is prohibited. 8 . Wear an eye protector and take effective protection measures. Battery Temperature CAUTION If a battery overheats. Therefore. If possible. When handling the storage battery.OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Commissioning Guide (U2000) 1 Safety Precautions Basic Precautions To ensure safety. you need to check whether the electrolyte overflows. Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. If the electrolyte overflows. Working lead-acid storage batteries emit flammable gas. ensure that its electrodes are upward. Wear rubber gloves and a protection coat to prevent the hazard caused by the overflowing electrolyte. disconnect the working battery before performing other operations. Before installing or maintaining the storage battery. take appropriate measures immediately. Short-Circuit DANGER A battery short-circuit may cause human injuries. Lay a storage battery horizontally and fix it properly to prevent the battery from emitting flammable gas. the battery may be deformed or damaged. Although the voltage of an ordinary battery is low. Ltd.

avoid direct eye exposure to the laser beams launched from the optical interface board or fiber connectors. When handling a leaky battery. Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. neutralize the acid and clean it up appropriately. the two endfaces and flange of every external fiber must be cleaned before the fiber is led into the equipment through the ODF for being inserted into an optical interface on the equipment. optical power commissioning is seriously affected. DANGER When installing or maintaining an optical interface board or optical fibers. Ltd. you can use the following substances to counteract and absorb the leaking electrolyte: l l Sodium bicarbonate (NaHCO3) Sodium carbonate (Na2CO3) In the event of acid overflow or spillage. clean the skin that contacts the battery electrolyte immediately by using water. The laser beam can cause damage to your eyes. protect against the possible damage caused by the acid. Hence.1 Safe Usage of Optical Fibers The laser beam can cause damage to your eyes. Cleaning Fiber Connectors and Optical Interfaces CAUTION If fiber connectors or flanges are contaminated. Therefore. 9 .6 Radiation This topic describes safety precautions for electromagnetic exposure and lasers. 1. you must exercise caution when using optical fibers. When you find the electrolyte leaks.6.OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Commissioning Guide (U2000) 1 Safety Precautions Battery Leakage CAUTION In the event of acid overflow or spillage. the person must be sent to a hospital immediately.. neutralize the acid and clean it up as recommended by the battery manufacturer and any local regulations for acid disposal. In case of a severe situation. If a person contacts battery electrolyte. 1.

Ltd. 10 . Install the attenuator on the IN port instead of the OUT port. Figure 1-2 shows a slanting optical interface. used with the recommended cleaning solvent Special magnifier for fiber connectors For cleaning steps. A high received optical power damages the optical interface. cover the fiber connector of the unused optical fiber with a protective cap. It is prohibited that you use alcohol and formalin. Do not directly connect an attenuator to the level optical interface. Directly connect an attenuator to a slanting optical interface. see Task Collection "Cleaning Fiber Connectors and Adapters" in the OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Maintenance and Troubleshooting. however. Replacing Optical Fibers When replacing an optical fiber.. Connecting Optical Fibers l l l Use an attenuator if the optical power is excessively high. Non-woven lens tissue Special compressed gas Cotton stick (medical cotton or long fiber cotton) Special cleaning roll. Use the optical distribution frame (ODF) to connect an attenuator to a level optical interface. and Figure 1-3 shows a level optical interface.OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Commissioning Guide (U2000) 1 Safety Precautions The fiber connectors and optical interfaces of the lasers must be cleaned with the following special cleaning tools and materials: l l l l l l Special cleaning solvent: It is preferred to use isoamylol. can also be used. Figure 1-2 Slanting optical interface Slanting optical interface Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. Propyl alcohol.

1. or look into the optical fiber outlet directly without eye protection.3 Forbidden Areas The topic describes requirements for a forbidden area.4 Laser This topic describes safety precautions for lasers. keep away from the transmit directions of the antennas when you install or maintain an antenna locally. if in the transmit direction.2 Electromagnetic Exposure This topic describes safety precautions for electromagnetic exposure.6.OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Commissioning Guide (U2000) 1 Safety Precautions Figure 1-3 Level optical interface Level optical interface 1. If multiple transmit antennas are installed on a tower or backstay. A physical barrier and an eye-catching warning flag should be available in each forbidden area.6. CAUTION Ensure that all personnel are beyond the transmit direction of a working antenna.. Ltd. 11 . l 1. l Before entering an area where the electromagnetic radiation is beyond the specified range. the associated personnel must shut down the electromagnetic radiator or stay at least 10 meters away from the electromagnetic radiator. Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. WARNING When handling optical fibers.6. do not stand close to.

cap to the fiber connectors. follow the safety precautions of microwave to ensure the safety of the human body and the equipment. if an optical tool such as a microscope. however. or eye loupe is used to view an un-terminated optical fiber. viewing an un-terminated optical fiber or a damaged optical fiber without eye protection at a distance greater than 150 mm does not cause eye injury. obey the following instructions: l l l l l l l All operations should be performed by authorized personnel who have completed the required training courses.6. Instructions Regarding Fiber Handling Read and abide by the following instructions before handling fibers: l l Only trained personnel are permitted to cut and splice fibers. Before opening the front door of an optical transmission device. ensure that you are not exposed to laser radiation. magnifying glass. Do not look into the end of an exposed fiber or an open connector when you are not sure whether the optical source is switched off. When installing or maintaining an aerial on the tower or mast that is installed with multiple aerials. 12 . switch off the transmitter in advance. Ltd.. Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. 1. Wear a pair of eye-protective glasses when you are handling lasers or fibers. Safety Instructions Regarding Lasers To avoid laser radiation.5 Microwave When installing and maintaining the equipment of Huawei. the eyes may be damaged. Before cutting or splicing a fiber. In normal cases. Do not use an optical tool such as a microscope.OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Commissioning Guide (U2000) 1 Safety Precautions Laser transceivers are used in the optical transmission system and associated test tools. WARNING Strong radio frequency can harm the human body. The laser transmitted through the bare optical fiber produces a small beam of light. or an eye loupe to view the optical connector or fiber that is transmitting optical signals. When a beam of light enters eyes. a magnifying glass. Ensure that the optical source is switched off before disconnecting optical fiber connectors. and therefore it has very high power density and is invisible to human eyes. After disconnecting the fiber. Use an optical power meter to measure the optical power and ensure that the optical source is switched off. ensure that the fiber is disconnected from the optical source. Eye injury may occur.

as shown in Figure 1-4. Issue orders with short and explicit words to ensure correct operations. 1.. The requirements for working at heights are as follows: l l l l l The personnel who work at heights must be trained.7 Working at Heights This topic describes safety precautions for working at heights. and ensure that they are intact. Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. Before hoisting heavy objects.1 Hoisting Heavy Objects This topic describes the safety precautions for hoisting heavy objects that you must follow when installing. Check all lifting appliances thoroughly before starting the work. l l l l l Only trained and qualified personnel can perform hoisting operations. Carry and handle the operating machines and tools with caution to prevent them from falling down. Before hoisting heavy objects. WARNING When working at heights. such as wearing a helmet and a safety belt. ensure that the hoisting tools are fixed to a secure object or wall with good weight-bearing capacity. be cautious to prevent objects from falling down. Safety measures. must be taken. 13 . and maintaining Huawei devices. Ensure that the angle between the two cables is less than or equal to 90 degrees during the lifting. operating. check that the hoisting tools are complete and in good condition.7. do not walk below the cantilever or hoisted objects.OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Commissioning Guide (U2000) 1 Safety Precautions 1. Wear cold-proof clothes when working at heights in cold areas. WARNING When heavy objects are being hoisted. Ltd.

Avoid overweighing the ladder. as shown in Figure 1-5. Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co..OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Commissioning Guide (U2000) 1 Safety Precautions Figure 1-4 Hoisting heavy objects 1. you should know the maximum weight capacity of the ladder. When using a ladder.7. ensure that the wider feet of the ladder are downward. Ltd.2 Using Ladders This topic describes safety precautions for using ladders. 14 . or take protection measures for the ladder feet. you can use the ladder. Checking Ladders l l Before using a ladder. Placing Ladders The proper slant angle of the ladder is 75 degrees. check whether the ladder is damaged. Before using a ladder. Ensure that the ladder is placed securely. to prevent the ladder from sliding. You can measure the slant angle of the ladder with an angle square or your arms. After checking that the ladder is in good condition.

15 . as shown in Figure 1-6. ensure that your body is stable to reduce risks. ensure that the ladder top is at least one meter higher than the roof..OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Commissioning Guide (U2000) 1 Safety Precautions Figure 1-5 Slanting a ladder Climbing Up a Ladder When climbing up a ladder. Before operations. pay attention to the following points: l l l Ensure that the center of gravity of your body does not deviate from the edges of the two long sides. Figure 1-6 Ladder top being one meter higher than the roof Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. Ltd. Do not climb higher than the fourth rung of the ladder (counted from up to down). If you want to climb up a roof.

8 Mechanical Safety This topic describes safety precautions for drilling holes. This is to prevent eyes from being injured by the splashing metal scraps. screws. clean up the metallic scraps. Otherwise. Wear an eye protector when drilling holes. the hands or the boards are damaged. Drilling holes without complying with the requirements affects the electromagnetic shielding performance of the cabinet and damages the cables inside the cabinet. if the scraps caused by drilling enter the cabinet. In addition.. Sharp Objects WARNING Wear protection gloves when carrying the device. Ltd. This is to prevent them from falling into the operating fans. After the drilling. Wear protection gloves when drilling holes. Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. This is to prevent hands from being hurt. remove the cables inside the cabinet. which damages the fans or device. handling sharp objects. and carrying heavy objects. Carrying Heavy Objects Wear protection gloves when carrying heavy objects. place the objects such as the parts. l l l l Before drilling a hole on the cabinet. Fans l l When replacing parts. Drilling Holes WARNING Do not drill holes on the cabinet without prior permission. the printed circuit boards (PCBs) may be short-circuited.OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Commissioning Guide (U2000) 1 Safety Precautions 1. Take measures to prevent the metallic scraps from falling into the cabinet. operating fans. 16 . and tools properly. keep your fingers or boards from touching operating fans before the fans are powered off and stop running. This is to prevent hands from being injured by the sharp edges of the device. When replacing the parts near fans.

This is to prevent the heavy objects on the cabinet top from falling down. Routing Cables In the case of extremely low temperature. or connection slots of the board to prevent damage caused by ESD of the human body to the electrostatic-sensitive components.OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Commissioning Guide (U2000) 1 Safety Precautions WARNING l The carrier must be prepared for load bearing before carrying heavy objects. When carrying a chassis. binding signal cables. 17 . Do not hold the handles of the modules installed in the chassis. Ltd. l Generally. pay attention to the unstable or heavy objects on the cabinet. wear an ESD wrist strap or ESD gloves. and boards.9 Other Precautions This topic describes safety precautions for removing and inserting boards. the carriers should stretch their backs and move stably to avoid being strained. fan modules. hold the handles or bottom of the chassis. When moving or lifting a chassis. When holding a board in hand. l l l Slide the board along the guide rails. Binding Signal Cables CAUTION Bind the signal cables separately from the high-current or high-voltage cables. which may hurt you. Do not contact one board with another to avoid short-circuits or damage. Removing and Inserting a Board CAUTION When inserting a board. l 1. To ensure the construction safety. and routing cables. and handle the board gently to avoid distorting pins on the backplane. comply with the following requirements: Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. It is prohibited that only one person carries a heavy chassis. l When you pull a chassis out of the cabinet. such as the power modules. two persons are needed to carry a chassis. components.. do not touch the board circuits. This is to prevent the carrier from being strained or pressed by the heavy objects. connectors. heavy shock or vibration may damage the plastic skin of the cables.

. IF Cables WARNING Before installing or removing an IF cable.OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Commissioning Guide (U2000) 1 Safety Precautions l l When installing cables. 18 . Ltd. ensure that the environment temperature is above 0°C. When touching the front panel of the board in such an environment. you must turn off the power switch of the IF board. l High Temperature WARNING If the ambient temperature exceeds 55°C. transfer them to a place at room temperature and store the cables for more than 24 hours before installation. Do not perform any improper operations. pushing the cables down directly from a truck. the temperature of the front panel surface marked the flag may exceed 70°C. you must wear the protection gloves. Handle the cables gently. especially in a low-temperature environment. for example. If the cables are stored in a place where the ambient temperature is below 0°C. Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co.

19 . turn off the ODU-PWR switch to avoid bodily injury or damage to the IF board and ODU. 2.4 Operation Guide for the IF Board Before removing or installing an IF board.2 Operation Guide for the IF Jumper Before removing or installing an IF jumper. 2. turn off the ODU-PWR switch to avoid bodily injury or damage to the IF board and ODU.1 Operation Guide for the Toggle Lever Switch The ODU-PWR switch on the IF board is a toggle lever switch which must be turned on and off as per the following instructions to avoid damaging the IF board. Ltd. 2..OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Commissioning Guide (U2000) 2 Notices for High-Risk Operations 2 Notices for High-Risk Operations About This Chapter This chapter provides notices for the operations that may cause bodily injury or equipment damage if they are not performed properly during the commissioning and maintenance of microwave equipment. turn off the ODU-PWR switch to avoid bodily injury or damage to the IF board and ODU. 2.3 Operation Guide for the IF Cable Before removing or installing an IF cable. Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co.

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Commissioning Guide (U2000) 2 Notices for High-Risk Operations 2.. as shown in Figure 2-1.1 Operation Guide for the Toggle Lever Switch The ODU-PWR switch on the IF board is a toggle lever switch which must be turned on and off as per the following instructions to avoid damaging the IF board. Ltd. 20 . Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. Gently pull on the toggle lever switch out. Position and Description of the Toggle Lever Switch The toggle lever switch is located on the IF board and controls the power that is fed to the ODU. Figure 2-1 Toggle lever switch O: OFF I : ON Turning On the Toggle Lever Switch 1.

21 . Turn it to the left.OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Commissioning Guide (U2000) 2 Notices for High-Risk Operations 2. Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. Ltd. Release the toggle lever switch. Gently pull on the toggle lever switch. 3. Turning Off the Toggle Lever Switch 1..

For details. turn off the ODU-PWR switch to avoid bodily injury or damage to the IF board and ODU. Ltd.1 Operation Guide for the Toggle Lever Switch.2 Operation Guide for the IF Jumper Before removing or installing an IF jumper.OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Commissioning Guide (U2000) 2 Notices for High-Risk Operations 2. Release the toggle lever switch. 22 . see 2. Turn it to the right.. Procedure Step 1 Turn off the ODU-PWR switch on the IF board. 3. 2. Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co.

Procedure Step 1 Turn off the ODU power switch on the IF board. ----End 2. Step 2 Remove or install the IF jumper.OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Commissioning Guide (U2000) 2 Notices for High-Risk Operations 1 2 DANGER Ensure that the ODU is completely powered off before removing or installing the IF jumper.3 Operation Guide for the IF Cable Before removing or installing an IF cable..1 Operation Guide for the Toggle Lever Switch. For details. Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. 23 . turn off the ODU-PWR switch to avoid bodily injury or damage to the IF board and ODU. Ltd. see 2.

see 2. Step 2 Install or remove the IF cable. ----End 2.OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Commissioning Guide (U2000) 2 Notices for High-Risk Operations 1 2 DANGER Ensure that the ODU is completely powered off before removing or installing the IF cable.4 Operation Guide for the IF Board Before removing or installing an IF board. Procedure Step 1 Turn off the ODU-PWR switch on the IF board. Ltd. 24 . turn off the ODU-PWR switch to avoid bodily injury or damage to the IF board and ODU. For details. Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co..1 Operation Guide for the Toggle Lever Switch.

25 .OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Commissioning Guide (U2000) 2 Notices for High-Risk Operations 1 2 3 3 DANGER Ensure that the ODU is completely powered off before removing or installing the IF board. Step 2 Disconnect the IF jumper or IF cable. ----End Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. Ltd.. Step 3 Remove or install the IF board.

1 Commissioning Process Based on the objects to be commissioned. 3.2 Determining the Commissioning Method By using the U2000 for commissioning. 3.3 Preparing Documents and Tools This section lists the document and tools that should be prepared prior to commissioning the equipment. The following sections provide a non-exhaustive checklist for both scenarios. 26 .4 Checking Commissioning Conditions Ensure that the equipment meets the commissioning requirements for the site or system prior to performing such tasks.OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Commissioning Guide (U2000) 3 Commissioning Preparations 3 About This Chapter Commissioning Preparations This chapter describes the preparations that need to be made prior to commissioning equipment. engineers can adopt the network commissioning method. Ltd. the process can be divided into two stages: site commissioning and system commissioning. 3.. 3. Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co.

1 Site Commissioning Process Site commissioning refers to commissioning that is performed on a hop and sites at both ends of a radio link.1 Commissioning Process Based on the objects to be commissioned. Site Commissioning Items (Configuring Site Commissioning Data by Using the Web LCT) Commissioning engineers can configure site commissioning data by using the Web LCT on site when they are: l l l Familiar with how to configure radio link data on the OptiX RTN 950. Equipped with a laptop on which the Web LCT is installed. Aware of the radio link data plan for the site. and is also performed in preparation of system commissioning.OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Commissioning Guide (U2000) 3 Commissioning Preparations 3. Table 3-1 Configuring site commissioning data by using the Web LCT Commissioning Item Powering On the Equipment Configuring Site Commissioning Data by Using the Web LCT Connecting the Web LCT Creating NEs by Using the Search Method Log in to an NE Changing the NE ID Changing the Name of an NE Setting the Communication Parameters of an NE Configuring Logical Boards Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co.. You can use the following methods to configure site commissioning data for the OptiX RTN 950 on site: l l Web LCT Handheld tool NOTE You can commission only basic items by using the handheld tool. Remarks Required Required Required Required Required Optional Required Required 27 . 3. the process can be divided into two stages: site commissioning and system commissioning. Site commissioning ensures that the sites and the radio link between the sites work properly. Ltd.1.

Aware of the radio link data plan for the site. Equipped with the handheld tool. 28 . Ltd. Site Commissioning Items (Configuring Site Commissioning Data by Using the Handheld Tool) Commissioning engineers can configure site commissioning data by using the handheld tool on site when they are: l l l Familiar with how to configure radio link data on the OptiX RTN 950.OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Commissioning Guide (U2000) 3 Commissioning Preparations Commissioning Item Configuring IF 1+1 protection Configuring IF/ODU Information for a Radio Link Synchronizing NE Time Configuring Orderwire Checking Alarms Testing Connectivity of Cables Testing Connectivity of E1 Cables (by Using the Web LCT) Testing Connectivity of Network Cables Testing Connectivity of Optical Fibers Aligning Antennasa Aligning Single-Polarized Antennas Aligning Dual-Polarized Antennas Querying the Status of Radio Links Querying the DCN Status Remarks Optional Required Required Optional Required Required when E1 cables are used on the site Required when network cables are used on the site Required when optical fibers are used on the site Required when microwave services are transmitted by single-polarized antennas Required when microwave services are transmitted by dual-polarized antennas Required Required NOTE a: Before aligning antennas. power on the equipment and configure site commissioning data on both ends of the radio link.. Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co.

. 3.2 System Commissioning Process System commissioning refers to commissioning for the entire microwave transmission network. System commissioning ensures that various services are transmitted properly and protection functions are implemented over the microwave transmission network.OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Commissioning Guide (U2000) 3 Commissioning Preparations Table 3-2 Configuring site commissioning data by using the handheld tool Commissioning Item Powering On the Equipment Configuring Site Commissioning Data by Using the Handheld Tool Connecting the Handheld Tool to the IDU Setting NE Attributes Configuring a Radio Link Checking Alarms Testing Connectivity of Cables Testing Connectivity of E1 Cables by Using the Handheld Tool Testing Connectivity of Network Cables Testing Connectivity of Optical Fibers Aligning the Antennasa Aligning Single-Polarized Antennas Aligning Dual-Polarized Antennas Remarks Required Required Required Required Required Required when E1 cables are used on the site Required when network cables are used on the site Required when optical fibers are used on the site Required when microwave services are transmitted by single-polarized antennas Required when microwave services are transmitted by dual-polarized antennas NOTE a: Before aligning antennas. Table 3-3 System commissioning process Commissioning Item Configuring Network-wide Service Data Testing E1 Services Testing E1 Services by Using a BER Tester Remarks Required Required when E1 service are available and a BER tester is available on site Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. 29 . power on the equipment and configure site commissioning data on both ends of the radio link.1. Ltd.

. Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co.OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Commissioning Guide (U2000) 3 Commissioning Preparations Commissioning Item Testing E1 Services Through PRBS Testing Ethernet Services Testing ATM Services Testing AM Switching Testing AM Switching by Using a BER Tester Testing AM Switching Without a BER Tester Testing Protection Switching Testing IF 1+1 Switching Testing N+1 Protection Switching Testing SNCP Switching Testing ERPS Switching Testing MPLS APS Protection Switching Testing Linear MSP Switching Checking the Clock Status Testing 24-Hour BER Remarks Required when E1 services are available and no BER tester is available on site Required when Ethernet services are available Required when ATM services are available Required when the AM function is enabled and a BER tester is available on site Required when the AM function is enabled and no BER tester is available on site Required when the radio links are configured with the 1+1 HSB/FD/SD Required when the N+1 protection is configured Required when the SNCP is configured Required when ERPS is configured Required when MPLS APS protection is configured Required when 1+1/1:N linear MSP is configured Required Required when E1 services are available 3. 30 .2 Determining the Commissioning Method By using the U2000 for commissioning. engineers can adopt the network commissioning method. Ltd.

including: – Network plan – Engineering design Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. 3. 2. Single-hop Commissioning The single-hop commissioning method is preferred for small-scale microwave transmission networks (for example. a network with only one or two radio link hops). 3. site commissioning and system commissioning are defined as follows: l Site commissioning refers to commissioning that is performed on a hop and sites at both ends of the radio link by connecting the commissioning tool to the NE at a single site. 31 . and therefore this document does not detail how to use the Web LCT. see the commissioning guide in the documentation package of the Web LCT version. On both ends of a radio link. The major commissioning steps are as follows: 1. power on the NEs.3 Preparing Documents and Tools This section lists the document and tools that should be prepared prior to commissioning the equipment. Network Commissioning The network commissioning method is usually used for large-scale microwave transmission networks. Use the Web LCT to complete the system commissioning items. By performing singlehop commissioning. For details about how to use the Web LCT. Ltd. power on the NEs. Documents The following document should be available before commissioning the equipment: l Engineering design documents. The major commissioning steps are as follows: 1. On both ends of a radio link. 4.OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Commissioning Guide (U2000) NOTE 3 Commissioning Preparations In the following instructions for both types of commissioning methods. Use the Web LCT to configure all service data on the NEs. 3. 2. Use the U2000 to complete the site commissioning items at sites where services converge.. l System commissioning refers to commissioning that is performed on all the NEs in the network by connecting the commissioning tool to a gateway NE where it configures the commissioning data for each site. Use the Web LCT to complete the site commissioning items. Use the U2000 to complete the system commissioning items at sites where services converge. NOTE The Web LCT is used for single-hop commissioning. 4. Configure site commissioning data by using the Web LCT or configure site commissioning data by using the handheld tool. you can complete all site and system commissioning items at a time.

. including: – OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Commissioning Guide – OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Configuration Guide Tools Table 3-4 lists the tools required for the commissioning task. Table 3-4 Tools and meters Tool and Meter l Adjustable wrench l Screwdriver l Telescope l Interphone l Hex key l Multimeter that has a test cable with a BNC connector at one end l North-stabilized indicator Laptop on which the Web LCT is installed l Configuring site commissioning data by using the Web LCT l Testing connectivity of E1 cables l Querying the DCN status Handheld tool l Configuring site commissioning data l Testing connectivity of E1 cables BER tester l Testing connectivity of E1 cables l Testing E1 services l Testing AM switching l Testing IF 1+1 switching l Testing N+1 protection switching l Testing SNCP switching l Testing linear MSP switching l Testing 24-hour BER Network cable tester l Optical power meter l Short fiber jumper PC on which the U2000 is installed E1 jumper Commissioning system items Testing 24-hour BER Testing connectivity of network cables Checking connectivity of optical fibers Application Scenario Aligning antennas Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. 32 .OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Commissioning Guide (U2000) 3 Commissioning Preparations l Commissioning guides. Ltd.

rain. or fog) that could hinder or impact the commissioning. Engineers are certified to commission the antennas. There is no adverse weather (such as wind. 3. The following sections provide a non-exhaustive checklist for both scenarios. Details about these requirements are as follows: l l l l l Hardware installation has been completed and has passed the installation check. 3. Power is available to the equipment.1 Site Commissioning Ensure that the equipment and weather meet the requirements for site commissioning.2 System Commissioning Ensure that the equipment and weather meet the requirements for system commissioning.4. snow. The service signal cables that are connected to other equipment have been properly routed.4 Checking Commissioning Conditions Ensure that the equipment meets the commissioning requirements for the site or system prior to performing such tasks. see the iManager U2000 Web LCT User Guide. Ltd. The appropriate risk control measures to arrest falling objects and ensure personnel safety are in place.OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Commissioning Guide (U2000) NOTE 3 Commissioning Preparations For details about the requirements and methods for installing the Web LCT. or fog) that could hinder or impact the commissioning. Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. Details about these requirements are as follows: l l Site commissioning at both ends of a radio link has been completed. rain.4. snow.. 33 . 3. There is no adverse weather (such as wind.

.7 Querying the DCN Status The NMS manages NEs through DCN channels. 4. 4.4 Testing Connectivity of Cables During the installation of the OptiX RTN 900. 4. 4.1 Powering On the Equipment By checking the power-on process of equipment.2 Configuring Site Commissioning Data by Using the Web LCT This topic describes how to configure site commissioning data when using the Web LCT to perform site commissioning. 4. or the hardware may malfunction. 4.3 Configuring Site Commissioning Data by Using the Handheld Tool This section describes how to configure site commissioning data by using the handheld tool. 34 .5 Aligning the Antennas Aligning the antennas is the most important activity in HOP commissioning. you can determine whether the DCN of the radio links runs properly. Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. By querying the radio links using the Search For Opposite NE. test connectivity of the cables. 4. Ltd. The alignment has a direct effect on the performance of the radio links.OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Commissioning Guide (U2000) 4 Site Commissioning 4 About This Chapter Site Commissioning Site commissioning includes the specific commissioning processes for all site commissioning items. you can verify whether the hardware system of the equipment and the power system are functioning properly.6 Checking the Status of Radio Links After aligning the antennas. query the status of radio links and determine whether the radio links are in the normal state. To ensure that the services run properly. the cables may be connected to service interfaces incorrectly.

If the switch points to "I". the switch is turned off. The power supply (for example. The voltage. Ltd. 35 . Context l For the OptiX RTN 950. l If the output voltage of the power supply does not meet test requirements. do not power on the cabinet. The power system is available. Prerequisite l l l Hardware installation has been completed and has passed the installation check. Table 4-1 Fuse currents Chassis OptiX RTN 950 Fuse Current ≥ 20 A l The OptiX RTN 950 supports the following system control. the switch is turned on. reconstruct the power supply and then test the output voltage again. Tools.. Hence. the power box of the cabinet) has been turned off.1 Powering On the Equipment By checking the power-on process of equipment. First. pole connection. If the switch points to "O". Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. the nominal voltage for the input power of each PIU board must be the same. the recommended fuse currents are listed in Table 4-1. you must pull out the switches lightly before you turn it. l The ODU-PWR switch on the front panel of the IF board is designed with a locking device. and Materials None. and fuse current of the power system have been checked in the process of connecting power cables. you can verify whether the hardware system of the equipment and the power system are functioning properly. and timing board: Chassis OptiX RTN 950 Board Type CSH/CST Precautions CAUTION l If the equipment is configured with two PIU boards. switching.OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Commissioning Guide (U2000) 4 Site Commissioning 4. Equipment.

and timing board and ensure that the equipment is powered on. Indicates a power failure. Figure 4-1 Normal state PIU indicator FAN indicator Step 2 Check the status of the indicators on the system control. Indicates that the fan is faulty. NOTE This process lasts longer if service data is configured. blinking green. the PIU and FAN indicators are steady green. The process lasts about 1 minute if service data is not configured. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. 36 . The board indicators should conform to the following states and sequences. Indicates that the fan is running properly. Table 4-2 provides the descriptions for the different states of the indicators. and off. 1. as shown in Figure 4-1. Table 4-2 Status of indicators Indicator PWR State Steady green Off FAN Steady green Steady red Off Description Indicates that the power supply is in the normal state. Ltd. Then. The PROG indicator should be green. In normal conditions. Indicates that the fan is powered off.OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Commissioning Guide (U2000) 4 Site Commissioning Procedure Step 1 Verify that the power cables of the chassis are correctly connected.. 2. Issue 01 (2011-10-30) The STAT and SYNC indicators should be green. switching. off. power on the equipment and check the status of the indicators.

the STAT indicator is on only after the corresponding logical board is added. Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. l For a board other than the system control. and timing board on the IDU. Ltd. ----End 4.2 Configuring Site Commissioning Data by Using the Web LCT This topic describes how to configure site commissioning data when using the Web LCT to perform site commissioning.OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Commissioning Guide (U2000) 4 Site Commissioning Figure 4-2 Normal state NOTE l For detailed meanings of the indicators. contact Huawei technical support. Step 3 Turn the ODU-PWR switch on the IF board to "I". l In the event of indicator abnormalities. NOTE l The ODU indicator on an IF board is green only after the logical board of the IF board connected to the ODU and the logical board of the ODU are created. STAT PROG SYNC ACTX ACTC 37 . see the IDU hardware description. switching..

Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. 38 ..OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Commissioning Guide (U2000) 4 Site Commissioning Configuration Process Figure 4-3 describes the process of configuring site commissioning data. Ltd.

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Commissioning Guide (U2000) 4 Site Commissioning Figure 4-3 Configuration flowchart Start Connecting the Web LCT to the IDU Creating NEs Logging in to NEs Changing NE IDs Changing NE names Setting NE communication parameters Configuring logical boards Procedure for configuring an radio link (XPIC enabled) Synchronizing NE time Procedure for configuring an radio link (XPIC disabled) Creating an XPIC group Creating an IF 1+1 protection group Setting the AM attributes of the XPIC hybrid radio link Configuring the IF/ODU information of a radio link Creating an IF 1+1 protection group Checking alarms Configuring the IF/ODU information of a radio link End Checking alarms Mandatory End Optional Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co.. 39 . Ltd.

Set IP and Subnet Mask as required. Mandatory. 7 8 Configuring Logical Boards Synchronizing NE Time Mandatory. It is recommended that you create an NE in IP Auto Discovery mode. Enter correct values in User Name and Password. l If a specific extended NE ID is required. 40 . Ltd. Mandatory. the IP address changes to 0x81000000 + NE ID. Procedure for Configuring NE Data Table 4-3 Procedure for configuring NE data Step 1 2 3 Action Connecting the Web LCT to the IDU Creating NEs by Using the Search Method Logging In to an NE Description Mandatory.OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Commissioning Guide (U2000) 4 Site Commissioning NOTE In TDM microwave mode. 5 6 Changing the NE Name Setting NE Communication Parameters Optional. the AM attributes do not need to be configured for the links where the XPIC function is enabled. and the default Password is password. This operation synchronizes NE time with the time on the computer that runs the Web LCT. Set parameters as follows: l Set ID according to the guideline specified in the DCN plan. Mandatory if special requirements are imposed on the IP address of the NE. Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. Mandatory. The default User Name is lct. 4 Changing the NE ID Mandatory. change Extended ID. NOTE If the IP address of an NE is not changed manually..

Ltd. Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co.8 Creating an IF 1+1 Protection Groupa Description Mandatory when radio links are configured with 1+1 protection. 41 .2.. Set the parameters according to the network plan.OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Commissioning Guide (U2000) 4 Site Commissioning Procedure for Configuring an Radio Link (XPIC Disabled) Table 4-4 Procedure for configuring an Radio link (XPIC disabled) Step 1 Action 4.

and TX Power(dBm) according to the network plan. indicating that the antennas are not aligned. the NE automatically disables the antenna misalignment indication function. STM-1. if the actual receive power of the ODU is 3 dB lower than the power expected to be received. T/R Spacing(MHz). – Set Guarantee E1 Capacity and Link ID according to the network plan. Work Mode must be configured as 7. 28MHz. you need to reset ATPC Enable Status according to site requirements. 128QAM. – Set TX Status to Unmute. and TX Power(dBm) according to the network plan. Ltd. set main parameters as follows: – Set AM Enable Status and IF Channel Bandwidth according to the network plan. l In the case of the TDM microwave. – Set TX Frequency(MHz). For radio links configured with 1+1 FD. l For TDM radio links configured with N+1 protection. NOTE l After the site commissioning. you need to configure the IF and ODU information on the main radio link and the ODU information on the standby radio link. the ODU indicator on the IF board connected to the ODU blinks yellow (300 ms on. 42 . – Set TX Frequency(MHz). – Set Power to Be Received(dBm) to the received signal level specified in the network plan. When the antenna misalignment indication function is enabled.9 Configuring the IF/ODU Information of a Radio Link Description Mandatory. set Manually Specified Modulation Mode to Modulation Mode of the Guarantee AM Capacity according to the network plan. – Set TX Status to Unmute. you need to configure the IF and ODU information on the main radio link only. – Set AM Enable Status to Disabled. l For radio links configured with 1+1 HSB/SD. 300 ms off). however. After the antennas are aligned for 30 consecutive minutes. – Set Power to Be Received(dBm) to the received signal level specified in the network plan. The antenna misalignment indication function is enabled only after this parameter is set. In addition. T/R Spacing(MHz)..OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Commissioning Guide (U2000) 4 Site Commissioning Step 2 Action 4. you need to configure the IF and ODU information on each link.2. The antenna Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. set main parameters as follows: – Set Work Mode and Link ID according to the network plan. l For the Integrated IP radio.

l For radio links configured with 1+1 HSB/SD. indicating that the antennas are not aligned. if the actual receive power of the ODU is 3 dB lower than the power expected to be received. you need to configure the IF and ODU information on each link.10 Creating an XPIC Workgroup Description Mandatory. the ODU indicator on the IF board connected to the ODU blinks yellow (300 ms on. After the antennas are aligned for 30 consecutive minutes. you need to configure the IF and ODU information on the main radio link only.2. Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. For radio links configured with 1+1 FD. NOTE l After the site commissioning. When the antenna misalignment indication function is enabled. you need to configure the IF and ODU information on the main radio link and the ODU information on the standby radio link. you need to reset AM Enable Status and ATPC Enable Status according to site requirements.OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Commissioning Guide (U2000) 4 Site Commissioning Step Action Description misalignment indication function is enabled only after this parameter is set. 3 Checking Alarms Mandatory. the NE automatically disables the antenna misalignment indication function.. 300 ms off). however. 43 . l To configure Integrated IP radio links with N+1 protection. Procedure for Configuring an Radio Link (XPIC Enabled) Table 4-5 Procedure for configuring an Radio link (XPIC enabled) Step 1 Action 4. Ltd. Set the parameters according to the network plan.

2.. l AM parameters must be the same in the horizontal and vertical polarization directions of the XPIC link. 44 . Set the parameters according to the network plan.OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Commissioning Guide (U2000) 4 Site Commissioning Step 2 Action 4.8 Creating an IF 1+1 Protection Group Mandatory when two XPIC workgroups need to form two 1 +1 protection groups. set AM Enable Status to Disabled. In addition. NOTE In TDM microwave mode. Ltd. set Manually Specified Modulation Mode to Modulation Mode of the Guarantee AM Capacity according to the network plan. NOTE One XPIC workgroup cannot form a 1+1 protection group. 3 4. Set parameters as follows: l If the AM function is enabled for the XPIC link. Set Manually Specified Modulation Mode to the modulation mode according to the network plan. the AM attributes do not need to be configured for the links where the XPIC function is enabled.2. l If the AM function is disabled.11 Setting the Hybrid/AM Attributes of the XPIC Workgroup Description Mandatory. The radio link in the horizontal/vertical polarization direction of the XPIC workgroup can form a 1+1 protection group with the radio link in the horizontal/vertical polarization direction of the other XPIC workgroup. set AM Enable Status to Disabled. Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co.

– Power to Be Received(dBm) must be the same in the horizontal and vertical polarization directions. the NE automatically disables the antenna misalignment indication function. When the antenna misalignment indication function is enabled. indicating that the antennas are not aligned. however. STM-1. the NE automatically disables the antenna misalignment indication function. Configure the IF and ODU information in both horizontal and vertical polarization directions. if the actual receive power of the ODU is 3 dB lower than the power expected to be received.9 Configuring the IF/ODU Information of a Radio Link Description Mandatory. Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. – NOTE l After the site commissioning. Work Mode must be configured as 7. l For TDM radio links configured with N+1 protection. Set parameters as follows: l In the case of the TDM microwave. l For the Integrated IP radio. set main parameters as follows: – Set Guarantee E1 Capacity according to the network plan. For radio links configured with 1+1 FD. – Set Power to Be Received(dBm) to the received signal level specified in the network plan. 28MHz. After the antennas are aligned for 30 consecutive minutes. After the antennas are aligned for 30 consecutive minutes. The antenna misalignment indication function is enabled only after this parameter is set. 300 ms off). indicating that the antennas are not aligned. When the antenna misalignment indication function is enabled. l For radio links configured with 1+1 HSB/SD. set main parameters as follows: – Set Power to Be Received(dBm) to the received signal level specified in the network plan. Ltd. you need to configure the IF and ODU information on each link. if the actual receive power of the ODU is 3 dB lower than the power expected to be received. 128QAM. you need to configure the IF and ODU information on the main radio link only.OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Commissioning Guide (U2000) 4 Site Commissioning Step 4 Action 4. The antenna misalignment indication function is enabled only after this parameter is set. 300 ms off). 45 . you need to reset ATPC Enable Status according to site requirements. the ODU indicator on the IF board connected to the ODU blinks yellow (300 ms on..2. you need to configure the IF and ODU information on the main radio link and the ODU information on the standby radio link. the ODU indicator on the IF board connected to the ODU blinks yellow (300 ms on.

NOTE l After the site commissioning. Step 3 Use a network cable to connect the Ethernet port of the laptop to the NMS/COM port on the system control. you need to configure the IF and ODU information on the main radio link only. Step 2 Set the IP address of the laptop. Ltd. but their IP addresses are different.2. Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co..0. however.9. 4. switching. l The subnet mask for the IP address of the laptop is the same as that for the IP address of the NE (the default subnet mask is 255. 5 Checking Alarms Mandatory.0) as the NE. l For radio links configured with 1+1 HSB/SD.0).0. you need to configure the IF and ODU information on the main radio link and the ODU information on the standby radio link.OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Commissioning Guide (U2000) 4 Site Commissioning Step Action Description – Power to Be Received(dBm) must be the same in the horizontal and vertical polarization directions. l The default gateway IP address is blank. you need to configure the IF and ODU information on each link. Prerequisite The equipment is powered on. you need to reset AM Enable Status and ATPC Enable Status according to site requirements. and Materials Web LCT Procedure Step 1 Start the laptop and log in to the operating system.255. and timing board.1 Connecting the Web LCT to the IDU Connecting the Web LCT to the IDU properly is a prerequisite for future data configuration and for other commissioning items. 46 . For radio links configured with 1+1 FD. l To configure Integrated IP radio links with N+1 protection. Equipment. Tools. The IP address of the laptop should meet the following requirements: l The IP address of the laptop is in the same network segment (the default network segment is 129.

change the IP address. A message will be displayed indicating that the network has established a local connection if the operating system has been configured to do so. 3. Step 6 Optional: Disable the Pop-up Blocker. After being returned to the General tab. Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. 4. the indicators at the Ethernet port and the NMS/COM port are on (green). Step 4 Optional: Set the Internet Explorer as the default browser. In Check for newer versions of stored pages. 5. switching. and timing board. the equipment or test tool may be damaged. straight-through cables and crossover cables can both be used to set up a connection.. Choose Tool > Internet Options from the main menu of the Internet Explorer. The system displays the USER LOGIN window of the Web LCT. NOTE If plug-ins that can block pop-up windows are also installed. For pin assignments for crossover cables and straight-through cables. Run the Internet Explorer. disable their blocking function. Ltd. double-click the Start Web LCT icon. Step 8 On the desktop. Therefore. Otherwise.OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Commissioning Guide (U2000) 4 Site Commissioning NMS/COM CAUTION Ensure that the network cable is properly connected to the Ethernet port of the laptop and the NMS/COM port on the system control. switching. On the General tab. see Network Cable in the OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description. 1. click Settings in the Temporary Internet files area. click OK. At this point. click Every visit to the page. 2. Step 5 Optional: Set the security level of the Internet Explorer to medium or lower. NOTE The NMS/COM port on the system control. 47 . Step 7 Optional: Set the options of the Internet Explorer. and timing board supports the auto-MDI/MDI-X mode. If the operating system displays a message indicating an IP address conflict. and then click OK.

2. Ltd.. and Materials Web LCT Procedure Step 1 Click NE Search in NE List and select a desired search type. the NE List page is displayed in the Internet Explorer. The NE user has the authority of Operation Level or higher.2 Creating NEs by Using the Search Method The search method is generally used to create an NE during site commissioning. ----End 4. Equipment. Tools. l User Name: admin l Password: admin If the entered user name and the password are both correct. 48 . Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. and then click Login. Prerequisite l l The communication between the NMS and the NE is in the normal state.OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Commissioning Guide (U2000) 4 Site Commissioning Step 9 Enter the values of User Name and Password.

Step 4 Set NE IP Address based on the network planning information. NOTE NE IP Address indicates the IP addresses of all NEs (searched out by the system automatically) that are connected to the NMS server directly through Ethernet cables. then: 1. NOTE Local IP Address indicates the IP address of an Ethernet port on the NMS server. Click Search. Ltd. Step 6 Select Advanced Search. 2.OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Commissioning Guide (U2000) 4 Site Commissioning If.. After the Web LCT finds the NEs to be managed. You do not need to enter the user name and password.. TIP When NE Search is selected. Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. 49 ... The Search NE dialog box is displayed. Step 3 Set Local IP Address based on the network planning information. There may be multiple Local IP Address values because an NMS server may have multiple network adapters. The Search NE dialog box is displayed. Step 5 Click OK. Ethernet cables Step 2 Select NE Search. Not all NEs are directly connected to the NMS server through Perform Step 6 to Step 11.. click End Search. Perform Step 2 to Step 5. All NEs are directly connected to the NMS server through Ethernet cables Then. Step 7 Optional: If you select IP auto discovery. the system can directly log in to NEs.

the Web LCT searches for the gateway NE and non-gateway NEs that are managed by the gateway NE in the network segment where the server resides. click End Search. Optional: Click Add to add a network segment. Click Manage Domain. Optional: Select an existing network segment and click Modify to modify the network segment. Optional: Select an existing network segment and click Delete to delete the network segment. 6. 50 . 2. Step 8 Optional: If you select Search NE. The Manage Domain Search dialog box is displayed. Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. Click Search. After the WebLCT finds the NEs. set Domain Type and Domain Address. then: 1.OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Commissioning Guide (U2000) 4 Site Commissioning NOTE In the IP auto discovery mode. 3. Then. 4.. Ltd. 5.

and Materials Web LCT Procedure Step 1 In the NE List. Prerequisite l l You must be an NM user with NE operator authority or higher. The default network segment cannot be modified or deleted. Step 2 Enter User Name and Password.255. indicating that the NE is added successfully.2. TIP You can select multiple NEs at one time.9.. select the target NE and click NE Login. A new NE has been added to the NE list. Step 10 Click OK. Step 11 Click Cancel. Then.3 Logging In to an NE After an NE is created.OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Commissioning Guide (U2000) NOTE 4 Site Commissioning During initial configuration. Ltd. 51 . Equipment. A dialog box is displayed. The NE Login dialog box is displayed. After the IP address of the gateway NE is changed. click OK.255. The NE to be managed is already created in NE List. the value of Manage Domain also needs to be changed. Tools. ----End 4. you need to log in to the NE before managing the NE. Manage Domain takes the default value of 129. Step 9 Select the NE that needs to be added and click Add NE. Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co.

Modifying the NE ID does not interrupt services. l Click to collapse/expand the legend. ----End Related References A. Alarm Status of the NE is changed from Unknown to the current alarm status of the NE..OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Commissioning Guide (U2000) 4 Site Commissioning NOTE l The default User Name is lct. The NE Explorer is displayed. Prerequisite The NE user has the authority of Operation Level or higher.2. TIP To quickly start the NE Explorer. 52 . TIP l Check the legend to learn the specific meanings of different colors and symbols in the slot layout diagram. l The default Password for user lct is password.2 Parameter Description: Login to an NE 4. Equipment. Ltd. double-click the NE to be managed in the NE list.4 Changing the NE ID Modify the NE ID according to the engineering plan and ensure that each NE ID is unique. Step 3 Click NE Explorer. Login Status of the NE in the NE List changes to Logged In. and Materials Web LCT Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. Tools.

name the NE according to the NE's geographical location or the device connected to the NE.OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Commissioning Guide (U2000) 4 Site Commissioning Procedure Step 1 Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Step 4 Click OK. Step 2 Click Modify NE ID. The Modify NE ID dialog box is displayed. ----End Related References A.5 Changing the NE Name For ease of identification in the Main Topology. Ltd. Choose Configuration > NE Attribute from the Function Tree.3 Parameter Description: NE Attribute_NE ID Change 4. Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. Tools. NOTE The name of an NE cannot contain any spaces or Chinese characters. and Materials Web LCT Procedure Step 1 In the NE Explorer. Step 3 Specify New ID and New Extended ID. Step 2 Enter the name of the NE in the Name field. Prerequisite The NE user has the authority of Operation Level or higher.2. Click OK in the displayed confirmation dialog box. 53 . select the NE from the Object Tree and choose Configuration > NE Attribute from the Function Tree.. Equipment.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. Otherwise.6 Setting NE Communication Parameters The communication parameters of an NE include the IP address of the NE.. Prerequisite The NE user must have the authority of Operation Level or higher. the gateway IP address.2. Choose Communication > Communication Parameters from the Function Tree. Ltd. ----End 4. and Materials Web LCT Procedure Step 1 Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. l If the new IP address in the IP field is not in the original network segment. Step 3 Click Apply. Step 2 Configure the communication parameters of the NE.OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Commissioning Guide (U2000) 4 Site Commissioning Step 3 Click Apply. and the subnet mask. Equipment. reset the IP address of the Web LCT and ensure that it is in the same segment as the new IP address of the NE. NOTE l If configuring multiple parameters. 54 . click Apply for each instance. Tools. the NE is unreachable to the Web LCT.

Equipment.OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Commissioning Guide (U2000) 4 Site Commissioning ----End Related References A. on the board.5 Parameter Description: NE Communication Parameter Setting 4. delete the data. such as the service. orderwire. All the boards are installed correctly. and protection. 55 . Prerequisite l l l The NE user has the authority of Operation Level or higher. Step 3 Optional: On the slot to which the board is to be deleted. delete the inconsistent logical board and add the correct logical board. The ODU-PWR switch on the IF board is turned on and the communication between the IDU and the ODU is normal. Step 2 Optional: On the slot to which the board is to be added. Ltd. right-click and select Add XXX.7 Configuring Logical Boards Add the logical board in the slot layout if it has not already been added. NOTE Before deleting the board. right-click and select Delete. and Materials Web LCT Procedure Step 1 Click the Slot Layout tab and click Add Physical Boards. Based on the slot layout. the NE automatically configures the logical boards that are required but are not yet configured for certain physical boards. "XXX" is the name of the board to be added.. If the physical board is inconsistent with the logical board in the slot layout. Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. clock. Tools.2.

needs to be set to the working board. Tools. and Materials Web LCT Background Information When a 1+0 service is converted into 1+1 HSB protection group by configuring an IF 1+1 protection group. 56 . Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. Prerequisite l l l The NE user must have the authority of Operation Level or higher. Equipment.8 Creating an IF 1+1 Protection Group If the radio link adopts 1+1 HSB/FD/SD protection.. The board where the original service exists. the original service is not interrupted.OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Commissioning Guide (U2000) 4 Site Commissioning ----End 4.2. however. The IF boards and the ODUs to which the IF boards are connected must be added on the Slot Layout. you need to create the corresponding IF 1 +1 protection group. Ltd. The IF boards of an IF 1+1 FD/SD protection group must be configured in the paired slots.

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Commissioning Guide (U2000) 4 Site Commissioning Procedure Step 1 For an IF 1+1 protection group comprised of ISU2 or ISX2 boards. Ltd. select the NE and then choose Configuration > Link Configuration from the Function Tree. l For ISU2 or ISX2 boards. In the NE Explorer. l Set Revertive Mode to Revertive. NOTE It is recommended to set the parameters for the 1+1 HSB/FD/SD protection as follows: l Set Working Mode according to the network plan.Anti-jitter Time(s) and Enable Reverse Switching must be set to the same value at both ends of a radio hop. ----End Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. Step 2 Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. 4. Step 4 Click New. when Working Mode is FD. The Create IF 1+1 Protection dialog box is displayed. Click Apply. WTR Time(s).. Step 6 Click OK. 1. set IF Service Type to appropriate values for the main and standby IF boards according to the network plan. Changes the values of IF Service Type for the main and standby IF boards according to the network plan. when Working Mode is SD. NOTE l Ensure that the values of IF Service Type set for the main and standby IF boards are the same and meet the network plan requirements. Choose Configuration > Link Configuration from the Function Tree. Step 3 Click the IF 1+1 Protection tab. 3. 57 . l Set Enable Reverse Switching according to the network plan. Enable Reverse Switching is invalid. When Working Mode is HSB. Revertive Mode. set Enable Reverse Switching to Enabled. 2. l Each of the parameters Working Mode. the default value of IF Service Type is Hybrid(Native E1+ETH). set Enable Reverse Switching to Disabled. Step 5 Configure the parameters of the IF 1+1 protection group. l Set WTR Time(s) to the default value. Click the IF/ODU Configuration tab.

Otherwise. AM enabled status. Prerequisite l l The NE user must have the authority of Operation Level or higher. services may be configured unsuccessfully or interrupted. The system displays the IF/ODU information of the radio link to which the IF board or ODU to which the IF board is connected belongs. and Materials Web LCT Precautions l l l l l For 1+1 HSB/SD protection. Procedure Step 1 In the NE Explorer. For 1+1 FD protection. Step 2 Click the IF/ODU Configuration tab. Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co.. you can configure the IF/ODU information for a radio link.9 Configuring the IF/ODU Information of a Radio Link By performing this operation. The MW_CFG_MISMATCH alarm is reported. Tools. or modulation mode is set inconsistently for both ends of an Integrated IP radio link. STM-1 count. select the NE and then choose Configuration > Link Configuration from the Function Tree. The IF boards and the ODUs to which the IF boards are connected must be added on the Slot Layout.2. you need to configure the IF/ODU information of the N+1 radio links respectively. Before configuring XPIC workgroups. you need to configure only the IF/ODU information of the main radio link. you need to configure the IF/ODU information of the main radio link and the ODU information of the standby radio link. if the E1 count. Ltd. 58 . Step 3 Click an IF board icon or ODU icon. This alarm should be cleared immediately. Equipment. you need to set IF Service Type separately for IF boards in the vertical polarization and those in horizontal polarization.8 Parameter Description: Link Configuration_IF 1+1 Protection 4. For N+1 protection.OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Commissioning Guide (U2000) 4 Site Commissioning Related References A.

The value of this parameter should not be higher than the rated maximum transmit power of the ODU. the parameter settings including the channel bandwidth.10 Creating an XPIC Workgroup If you configure two XPIC radio links after binding the two radio links as an XPIC workgroup. and Materials Web LCT Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. and ATPC attribute are the same for the two radio links. Equipment. Step 6 Click Apply. Tools.OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Commissioning Guide (U2000) 4 Site Commissioning Step 4 Configure the corresponding IF information of the radio link. ----End Related References A. The antenna misalignment indication function is enabled only after this parameter is set. l Set Power to Be Received(dBm) according to the network plan. l Set TX Power(dBm) according to the network plan. transmit power.10 Parameter: Link Configuration_IF/ODU Configuration 4. 59 . l Set TX Status to Unmute.. transmit frequency.2. Prerequisite l l The NE user must have the authority of Operation Level or higher. Ltd. Step 5 Configure the corresponding ODU information of the radio link. NOTE The recommended settings for the parameters are as follows: l Set TX Frequency(MHz) and T/R Spacing(MHz) according to the network plan. The corresponding XPIC IF boards and the ODUs connected to the XPIC IF boards are added to the NE Panel.

Ltd.6 Parameter Description: Link Configuration_XPIC Workgroup_Creation 4.2. Prerequisite l l The NE user has the authority of Operation Level or higher. and Materials Web LCT Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. 60 . The Create XPIC Working Group dialog box is displayed. Choose Configuration > Link Configuration from the Function Tree. The XPIC protection group has been created.11 Setting the Hybrid/AM Attributes of the XPIC Workgroup After the XPIC Workgroup is created. Equipment.. you need to configure the AM attributes of the XPIC Integrated IP radio link according to the planned values. ----End Related References A. Tools. Step 4 Configure the parameters for the XPIC protection group. Step 3 Click New.OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Commissioning Guide (U2000) 4 Site Commissioning Procedure Step 1 Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Step 5 Click OK. Step 2 Click the XPIC tab.

Choose Configuration > Link Configuration from the Function Tree. Step 4 Configure the AM attributes of the XPIC Hybrid radio link.2. Tools.12 Synchronizing NE Time Adjust the NE time so that the NE time is synchronized with the time on the NMS. or an abnormal event occurred. a performance event. In this manner. IFX2 and ISX2.OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Commissioning Guide (U2000) 4 Site Commissioning Background Information The XPIC IF boards. and Materials Web LCT Procedure Step 1 Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. and the AM attributes can be configured. Step 5 Click Apply.. Ltd. Procedure Step 1 Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Step 3 Click the Hybrid/AM Configuration tab. Step 2 Click the XPIC tab. 61 . You must be an NM user with NE maintainer authority or higher. Equipment. support Integrated IP radio. Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. Time settings on the Web LCT are correct. and choose Configuration > NE Time Synchronization from the Function Tree. ----End Related References A. Prerequisite l l l The basic data of NEs on the entire network has been configured. the NMS can accurately record the time when an alarm.7 Parameter Description: Link Configuration_XPIC 4.

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. Equipment. and Materials Web LCT Procedure Step 1 Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Tools. Step 3 Configure the orderwire information.. 2. ----End 4.OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Commissioning Guide (U2000) 4 Site Commissioning Step 2 Right-click the NE whose time needs to be synchronized and choose Synchronize with NM Time from the shortcut menu.13 Configuring the Orderwire The orderwire for an NE provides a dedicated communication channel that the network maintenance personnel can use. Choose Configuration > Orderwire from the Function Tree. Step 5 Optional: Change the overhead bytes occupied by the orderwire. 62 . Configure Orderwire Occupied Bytes. Ltd.2. Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Click the Advanced tab. Prerequisite The NE user must have the authority of Operation Level or higher. Step 2 Click the General tab. Step 4 Click Apply. 1.

and Materials Web LCT Procedure Step 1 In the NE Explorer. Equipment. you can determine whether the equipment is working properly.15 Parameter Description: Orderwire_General A. ----End Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. Tools. Prerequisite l l The equipment is connected to the Web LCT.2.OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Commissioning Guide (U2000) 4 Site Commissioning 3. ----End Related References A. Click Apply. 63 on the toolbar. and then click Step 2 Click the Browse Current Alarms tab. the following alarms in particular: l POWER_ALM l FAN_FAIL l HARD_BAD l BD_STATUS l SYNC_C_LOS l CONFIG_NOSUPPORT l NESF_LOST l TEMP_ALARM l IF_CABLE_OPEN l XPIC_LOS For details about the preceding alarms and about how to handle them.14 Checking Alarms By checking the alarms generated by the equipment. Step 3 Check the displayed alarm information.. . refer to the OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide. Data configuration is complete. Check whether there are any equipment alarms.16 Parameter Description: Orderwire_Advanced 4. Ltd. select an NE from the Object Tree.

3 Configuring Site Commissioning Data by Using the Handheld Tool This section describes how to configure site commissioning data by using the handheld tool.1 Connecting the Handheld Tool to the IDU The handheld tool needs to be connected to the IDU before data configuration. Figure 4-4 Connecting the handheld tool to the IDU Hand-held tool NMS/COM port on the CSH. 64 . and Materials Handheld tool Procedure Step 1 Use appropriate cables to connect the handheld tool to the OptiX RTN 950. and then press Enter. Tools. Step 3 Press Up or Down button to log in to the local NE or another NE. Ltd. 4.. Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. the login window is displayed. Two seconds later.3. Equipment. CST board MINI USB port DB9-female DB9-male RJ-45 connector Step 2 Press the Power button on the handheld tool until the handheld tool starts.OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Commissioning Guide (U2000) 4 Site Commissioning 4. as shown in Figure 4-4. Prerequisite The equipment is powered on.

3. Ensure that the NE ID is correct. 2. 65 . The information about the queried slot is displayed in the standby window.. and then press Enter. Enter the extended NE ID. Ltd. Enter the basic NE ID. and then press Enter. Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. 1. and then press Enter. press the C button to return to the upper-level menu and rectify it. enter the basic NE ID and extended NE ID.OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Commissioning Guide (U2000) 4 Site Commissioning Step 4 Optional: If you select to log in to another NE. Step 5 The handheld tool is logged in to the system automatically and the NE information is queried. NOTE If the input basic NE ID or extended NE ID is incorrect.

Otherwise. the AM function is disabled by default on the handheld tool. 66 . Do not press any button in the login process. Otherwise. the system stops the login process. Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. Prerequisite The handheld tool is logged in to the NE. l In the standby window. If the arrow blinks regularly. Step 2 Set NE name. the handheld tool starts another login attempt until login succeeds.. the configuration interface is displayed. NE IP. 1.OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Commissioning Guide (U2000) NOTE 4 Site Commissioning l If the Login Fail ! message is displayed in the login window. 2. Then. and NE name. ----End 4. l If the Abnormal Connection message is displayed in the standby window. Set the NE name according to the network plan. check the physical connection between the handheld tool and the NE.3. l The upward arrow in the upper right corner of the standby interface indicates the status of the physical connection. Ltd. l Login is completed automatically and may last a long period. Ensure that the connection is normal and then relog in to the system. NOTE In the case of the Integrated IP radio. the handheld tool relogs in to the system any time you press the 0 button. press F2 to configure NE attributes. the connection is normal. Select 1-NE name and press Enter. relog in to the system according to the prompt message of the system. Procedure Step 1 When the handheld tool displays the standby window.2 Setting NE Attributes Setting NE attributes includes setting NE ID.

Select 6-MSK and press Enter. Select 2-NE ID and press Enter. 4. Press Enter to confirm the setting and return to the previous menu. the configuration interface is displayed. Then. Press Enter to confirm the setting and return to the previous menu. Then. Set the extended ID according to the network plan. Ltd. Then. Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. 2. Set NE ID according to the network plan. 6. subnet mask. Step 4 Configure NE IP. 3. and gateway NE. After you finish one field. 1. the configuration interface is displayed. l An NE name can contain a maximum of 21 characters currently. 3. 67 . Press Enter to confirm the setting and return to the previous menu. 1. Select 5-IP and press Enter. NOTE The IP address is composed of four fields. 3.. Select 3-Ext-ID and press Enter. Set NE IP according to the network plan. You can press F1 to shift between different symbols. Step 3 Configure NE ID and extended ID. the configuration interface is displayed. 4. 2.OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Commissioning Guide (U2000) NOTE 4 Site Commissioning l Only the first 11 characters of the NE name can be displayed on the interface. Press Enter to confirm the setting and return to the previous menu. 5. Then. the configuration interface is displayed. press Enter to enter the next field.

Step 6 Select YES and press Enter to save the data. and protection modes of the radio link. the handheld tool automatically relogs in to the system after the system successfully backs up the updated data. you can configure the IF information. Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co.. you can press C to return to the previous menu. 8. Then.3. Procedure Step 1 When the handheld tool displays the standby window. Then.OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Commissioning Guide (U2000) 4 Site Commissioning 5. 7. Step 5 Select 8-APPLY. 9. it automatically backs up the database and the backup operation lasts 30 to 60 seconds. The Confirm Configure ? dialog box is displayed. and press Enter to save the data. ----End 4. Set the gate NE according to the network plan. l After the system saves the configuration. You need to check the backup result. the active configuration interface is displayed. the system starts saving the previous configuration. Then. press F1 to configure IF attributes. l If you change NE ID or extended ID in the configuration process. NOTE l In the configuration process.3 Configuring a Radio Link To configure a radio link. Set the subnet mask according to the network plan. Press Enter to confirm the setting and return to the previous menu. 6. If the system fails in backing up the updated data. Press Enter to confirm the setting and return to the previous menu. ODU information. the standby interface is displayed. Select 7-GNE and press Enter. Ltd. the configuration interface is displayed. 68 . Prerequisite The handheld tool is logged in to the NE.

Step 2 Select the required IF board. Press Enter to return to the previous menu. 2. Select an IF 1+1 protection mode according to the network plan. NOTE In the case of 1+1 HSB/SD radio links. Step 3 Configure IF 1+1 protection. 69 . the configuration interface is displayed. Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. Select the online IF board. 1. the configuration interface of IF 1+1 protection modes is displayed. you need to configure the IF and ODU information of the main radio link only. Press Enter to return to the previous menu. the system displays the information about the radio link carried by the IF board in the slot with the smallest number. 3. Then. When you configure IF 1+1 protection with the handheld tool. Select 7-Protection and press Enter. Select 1-Board and press Enter. Ltd.OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Commissioning Guide (U2000) 4 Site Commissioning NOTE By default. the default main/standby IF boards are as follows: Link ID 1 2 3 Slot of Main IF Board 1 3 4 Slot of Standby IF Board 2 5 6 3. 2. Then. 1..

The following figure shows available IF bandwidth in this mode.. The following figure shows available IF bandwidth in this mode. a. 2. Step 4 Configure IF information for a radio link 1. the configuration interface of IF bandwidth is displayed. Then. you need to configure the IF and ODU information of the main radio link only. NOTE For the ISU2/ISX2 board. Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Select the IF bandwidth according to the network plan. the configuration interface is displayed. If you select 1-ISU2/ISX2. If you select 2-ISU2/ISX2. Select a working mode for the ISU2/ISX2 board by pressing the Up and Down keys. If you select 3-ISU2/ISX2. press Enter. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. the ISU2/ISX2 board works in SDH mode. Then. b. d. Select 5-BandWidth and press Enter. Ltd. c. Then. The following figure shows available IF bandwidth in this mode. 70 . press Enter. the ISU2/ISX2 board works in Hybrid (Native E1+ETH) mode. The configuration interface of IF bandwidth is displayed. the ISU2/ISX2 board works in Hybrid (Native STM-1+ETH) mode.OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Commissioning Guide (U2000) NOTE 4 Site Commissioning In the case of 1+1 HSB/SD radio links.

l If the ODU is online. interfaces for selecting modulation modes are IF bandwidth-specific. NOTE For the ISU2/ISX2 board. 5. the system displays the frequency range that the ODU supports. you need to configure the IF and ODU information of the main radio link only. 71 . 2. NOTE In the case of 1+1 HSB/SD radio links. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. Then. Select 2-Frequency and press Enter. NOTE Press the F1 key to enter a point. 1. 3. 4. Press Enter to confirm the setting and return to the previous menu.OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Commissioning Guide (U2000) 4 Site Commissioning 3. Select the modulation mode according to the network plan. 5. Then. Press Enter to return to the previous menu. Select 6-Modulate and press Enter. the configuration interface of T/R spacing is displayed. Then. Enter the value of transmit frequency (MHz) according to the network plan. Enter the value of T/R spacing (MHz) according to the network plan. 6. NOTE l Press the F1 key to enter a point. Select 3-TRSpacing and press Enter. Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Press Enter to confirm the setting and return to the previous menu. 6. the configuration interface of modulation modes is displayed. Press Enter to return to the previous menu.. Step 5 Configure the ODU information of an NE. the configuration interface of transmit frequencies is displayed. NOTE In the case of 1+1 HSB/SD radio links. Ltd. 4. you need to configure the IF and ODU information of the main radio link only.

4 Checking Alarms By checking the alarms generated on the equipment. The system starts delivering the configuration. Then. press F3 to query the NE information. Select 4-TX Power and press Enter.OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Commissioning Guide (U2000) 4 Site Commissioning 7. Prerequisite The handheld tool is logged in to the NE. Enter the value of transmit power (dBm) according to the network plan. Ltd. After the configuration data is saved. After the configuration is delivered. 9. the query interface is displayed. ----End 4. 8. Step 7 Press any key to continue. the current configuration interface is automatically displayed. you can check whether the equipment is working properly.. the last line of the system interface displays Any Key To Continue. the configuration interface of transmit power is displayed. NOTE Press the F1 key to enter a point. Procedure Step 1 When the handheld tool displays the standby window. Then. Step 6 Select 8 APPLY and press Enter to confirm the configuration. Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. Press Enter to confirm the setting and return to the previous menu.3. Step 2 Select 5-Current Alarm Query and press Enter. NOTE The waiting time is about 30 to 60 seconds. 72 .

the following alarms in particular: l POWER_ALM l FAN_FAIL l HARD_BAD l BD_STATUS l SYNC_C_LOS l CONFIG_NOSUPPORT l NESF_LOST l TEMP_ALARM l IF_CABLE_OPEN l XPIC_LOS For details about the preceding alarms and about how to handle them. and the E1 port must travel through the DDF before being connected to another device. the cables may be connected to service interfaces incorrectly.1 Testing Connectivity of E1 Cables by Using the Web LCT By testing connectivity of E1 cables. Tools. The BER tester displays the AIS alarm.OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Commissioning Guide (U2000) TIP 4 Site Commissioning You can press the Up or Down button to check the query result about OptiX RTN 950. Equipment. 73 . or the hardware may malfunction.4. Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. Step 3 Check the displayed alarm information. 4.. ----End 4. refer to the OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide. To ensure that the services run properly. Prerequisite The equipment must be equipped with an E1 interface board. test connectivity of the cables. and whether the E1 cables are in the normal state. connect the BER tester to the first E1 port of the IDU. Check whether there are any equipment alarms.4 Testing Connectivity of Cables During the installation of the OptiX RTN 900. and Materials l l Web LCT BER tester Procedure Step 1 At the DDF. Ltd. you can check whether the E1 cables are properly connected between the equipment and the DDF.

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Commissioning Guide (U2000)

4 Site Commissioning

Figure 4-5 Connecting the BER tester
DDF
RX TX

RX

TX

. . . .

1 2 3 4

BER tester

Step 2 Set the corresponding E1 port to Outloop using the Web LCT. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. Select the PDH interface board in the Object Tree. In the Function Tree, choose Configuration > PDH Interface. Select By Function and select Tributary Loopback from the drop-down menu. In Tributary Loopback, select Outloop. Click Apply. The Confirm dialog box is displayed. Click OK.

Step 3 Observe the BER tester. The BER tester should not display the AIS alarm any more. Step 4 Release the outloop set in Step 2. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. Select the PDH interface board in the Object Tree. In the Function Tree, choose Configuration > PDH Interface. Select By Function and select Tributary Loopback from the drop-down menu. In Tributary Loopback, select Non-Loopback. Click Apply. The Confirm dialog box is displayed. Click OK.

Step 5 Observe the BER tester. The BER tester should report the AIS alarm. Step 6 Repeat Step 1 to Step 5 to test all the other E1 ports. ----End

4.4.2 Testing Connectivity of E1 Cables by Using the Handheld Tool
By testing connectivity of E1 cables, you can check whether the E1 cables between the equipment and the DDF are connected correctly, and whether the E1 cables are in normal status. When performing site commissioning with the handheld tool, test the connectivity of E1 cables using the PRBS function enabled on the NE.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 74

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Commissioning Guide (U2000)

4 Site Commissioning

Prerequisite
l l The NE houses an E1 interface board, and the E1 port travels through the DDF before being connected to another device. The handheld tool is logged in to the NE.

Tools, Equipment, and Materials
Handheld tool

Procedure
Step 1 Connect the handheld tool to the OptiX RTN 950. For details, see 4.3.1 Connecting the Handheld Tool to the IDU. Step 2 On the DDF, perform a hardware loopback at the first E1 port on the IDU.
DDF
RX TX

. . . .

1 2 3 4

Step 3 Test the cable connectivity of the first port with the handheld tool. 1. When the handheld tool displays the standby window, press F3 to query the NE information.

2.

Select 6-E1 Cable Check and press Enter. Then, the tributary board configuration interface is displayed.

3.

Select the tributary board that is connected to the first E1 port, and press Enter to test cable connectivity.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 75

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Commissioning Guide (U2000)

4 Site Commissioning

4.

Check the test result. Port 1 does not fail.

5.

Press any button to display the NE information query interface.

Step 4 Release the hardware loopback that is performed in Step 2. Step 5 Repeat Step 2 to Step 4 to test cable connectivity at the other ports. ----End

4.4.3 Testing Connectivity of Network Cables
By testing connectivity of network cables, you can determine whether the network cables are in the normal state.

Prerequisite
The network cables are already made.

Tools, Equipment, and Materials
Network cable tester

Background Information
You can also test the connectivity of a network cable by performing a loopback on the data ports (this method is applicable when the equipment is powered on). Specifically, use the network cable to be tested to connect any two data ports. If the LINK indicators of the two data ports turn on, it indicates that the network cable is in the normal state.

Procedure
Step 1 Connect the network cable to the port of the network cable tester.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

76

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Commissioning Guide (U2000)

4 Site Commissioning

Figure 4-6 Testing the Ethernet service cable

Step 2 Check the indicator of the network cable tester. Network Cable End A End B The 1-8-G indicators turn on one after another. The 3-6-1-4-5-2-7-8-G indicators turn on one after another.

Straight-through cable The 1-8-G indicators turn on one after another. Crossover cable The 1-8-G indicators turn on one after another.

Step 3 Connect the network cable that passes the test to the Ethernet port of the device. ----End

4.4.4 Checking Fiber Jumper Connection
During installation, the fiber jumpers may be incorrectly connected or the attenuation may be excessively high. As a result, services will fail to run properly. To prevent this situation, check the connection after the fiber jumper is routed from the optical interface to the optical distribution frame (ODF). This topic mainly describes how to test the fiber jumper connection by using an optical interface board.

Prerequisite
l l The fiber jumper is installed and routed from the optical interface to the ODF. The equipment is powered on.

Tools, Equipment, and Materials
l l Optical power meter Short fiber jumper

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

77

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Commissioning Guide (U2000)

4 Site Commissioning

Precautions

DANGER
When you are checking the connection of fiber jumpers, avoid direct eye exposure to the laser beams.

Connection Diagram
When you use an optical interface board to test the fiber jumper connection, connect the fiber jumper to the optical power meter on the ODF side and connect the fiber jumper to the TX port of the optical interface board on the chassis side. Figure 4-7 shows the connection. Figure 4-7 Connection diagram for checking the fiber jumper connection by using an optical interface board

External Cable

TX

RX

ODF

Fiber jumper connected to the TX port

Procedure
Step 1 On the chassis side, disconnect the fiber jumper from the TX port of the optical interface board. Step 2 Connect the optical power meter to the TX port of the optical interface board with a short fiber jumper. Step 3 Switch on the optical power meter and set the operating wavelength according to the type of optical interface. The measured launched optical power of the optical interface board is A. Step 4 Insert the fiber jumper back into the TX port. Step 5 On the ODF side, disconnect the fiber jumper from the TX port. Connect the fiber jumper to the optical power meter. The measured optical power is B.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 78

CAUTION If the fiber jumper is connected through a flange. Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. Step 7 Compare the values of A and B. Figure 4-8 is a vertical azimuth diagram. Verify that the fiber jumper is in good condition and is correctly routed. l If the difference between A and B is more than 1 dB. Generally. it indicates that the fiber jumper is incorrectly connected or the attenuation of the fiber jumper is not within the normal range. 4.. Verify that the fiber jumper terminal is clean. The lobe with the strongest radiated power is the main lobe. verify that the fiber jumper is in good condition and is correctly routed. The alignment has a direct effect on the performance of the radio links. Step 9 Restore the fiber jumper connections on the chassis side and the ODF side.1 Main Lobe and Side Lobes Engineers performing an alignment on an antenna should be familiar with the related knowledge of the main lobe and side lobes Definitions of the Main Lobe and Side Lobes The electric field strength of the radiated power of an antenna varies in space. there are the horizontal azimuth diagram for the horizontal section and the vertical azimuth diagram for the vertical section.OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Commissioning Guide (U2000) 4 Site Commissioning Step 6 Disconnect the fiber jumper from the TX port of the optical interface board. Step 8 Repeat Steps 1 through 7 to check the fiber jumper that is connected to the RX port. Ltd.5 Aligning the Antennas Aligning the antennas is the most important activity in HOP commissioning. verify that the fiber jumper terminal is clean. Then.5. it indicates that the fiber jumper is correctly connected and the attenuation of the fiber jumper is within the normal range. Then. the difference between A and B should be less than 2 dB. ----End 4. There are many lobes in this figure. The optical power meter reads "LO" and does not receive any optical signals. 79 . The other lobes are side lobes wherein the first side lobe can be used for aligning the antenna. Step 10 Repeat Steps 1 through 7 to check fiber jumper connections of other optical interfaces and then restore the connections when completed. l If the difference between A and B is less than 1 dB. The differences of the power distribution can be shown in an azimuth diagram. Otherwise.

in the case of a 1.7°. Figure 4-9 shows the head-on view of a free-space model for radio propagation with concentric rings of side lobe peaks and troughs radiating outward from the main lobe. the main lobe signal peak is 20-25 dB higher than the first side lobe signal peak. 30 dB or more lower than the main lobe a Horizontal section of the antenna b Head-on view Second side lobe. The main lobe width of the microwave antenna is narrow. 80 . 30 dB lower than the main lobe First side lobe. Figure 4-9 Horizontal section and front view of the antenna 180o 90o 0o Center of the main lobe 180o Outer edge of the main lobe. very small alignment adjustments are required to locate the main lobe. Antenna movement across the main lobe results in a rapid rise and fall in the signal level.2 m antenna at a working frequency of 23 GHz.OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Commissioning Guide (U2000) 4 Site Commissioning Figure 4-8 Main lobe and side lobes Main lobe First side lobe Second side lobe Locating the Main Lobe Antenna alignment involves making the main lobe of the local antenna align with the main lobe of the opposite antenna.9° when the signal level drops from the signal peak to zero. Typically. Ltd. 310 dB lower than the main lobe Trough between the main lobe and the first side lobe. The purpose is to make the received signal strength of the opposite antenna reach the maximum value. 20-25 dB lower than the main lobe Trough between the first side lobe and the second side lobe. Once a signal is detected. the azimuth is only 0. Whether the main lobe is aligned properly can be verified by comparing the received signal peaks. For instance.6° and 3. where signals are very weak 90o 0o Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. between 0..

As a result. Figure 4-10 Three tracking paths Head-on view of tracking paths for different elevations Signal levels for each path 6 7 C B A 4 1 2 6 7 5 3 C' B' A' C 4 B 2 1 A 3 A' 5 B' C' l Line AA' indicates that the main lobe of the antenna is almost aligned properly. adjust the elevation of the antenna until the three signal peaks of line AA' appear. Then. The correct method is to set the azimuth of the antenna to the middle of points 6 and 7. or top to bottom along line EE'. The signal peak at point 4 is higher than the signal peak at point 5 because of the antenna characteristics. and signal levels at three different elevation positions (1-7 represent the measured signal level values of the received signal strength indicator (RSSI) port of the ODU). Then. Figure 4-10 shows a horizontal radio propagation model of the antenna. Slightly adjust the elevation and azimuth of the antenna at point 2 as shown in Figure 4-10 until the peak signal appears. As a result. and the first side lobes are at points 1 and 3. As a result. as shown in Figure 4-11. point 4 may be mistaken for the peak point of the main lobe signal. The correct method is to set the azimuth of the antenna to the middle position between the two signal peaks. l l When the side lobe peak at one side is higher than the side lobe peak at the other side. Slightly adjust the azimuth of the antenna at point 2 until the peak signal appears. Slightly adjust the elevation and azimuth of the antenna at point 2 until the peak signal appears. point 1 may be mistaken for the peak point of the main lobe signal. Ltd. The signal peaks appear at points 4 and 5. adjust the elevation of the antenna until the three signal peaks of line AA' appear.. Slightly adjust the elevation and azimuth of the antenna at point 2 until the peak signal appears. points 6 and 7 may be mistaken for the peak point of the main lobe signal. The signal peak of the first side lobe at point 6 and the signal peak of the first side lobe at point 7 appear as one signal peak. The main lobe is at point 2. Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co.OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Commissioning Guide (U2000) 4 Site Commissioning Tracking Path Side lobe signal readings are sometimes mistaken for main lobe readings when signals are tracked on different elevation (or azimuth). 81 . Line BB' indicates that the elevation of the antenna slightly deviates from the main lobe. Line CC' indicates that the elevation of the antenna completely deviates from the main lobe and is almost aligned with the first side lobe. a common error is moving the antenna left to right along line DD'. The correct method is to adjust the elevation in the middle of points 1 and 2 or the azimuth in the middle of points 1 and 3. Several adjustments are required so that the three signal peaks of line AA' can appear.

The ATPC function is disabled (its default status on the NE is Disabled). After the antennas are aligned. power off the standby ODUs at both ends before aligning the antennas. Ltd. and Materials l l l l l l Adjustable wrench Telescope Interphone Hex key Multimeter (with a BNC connecter prepared at one end for future tests) North-stabilized indicator Precautions l If the radio link is configured in 1+1 protection mode and one antenna is used at each end..5. Equipment. snow. align the antennas in the following sequence: Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. power on the standby ODUs at both ends. or fog.2 Aligning Single-Polarized Antennas When aligning single-polarized antennas. Tools. Prerequisite l l l l l l The site commissioning of the radio equipment at both ends of the radio link is complete. The weather at both stations is suitable for outdoor operations and there is no threat of rain. On-site conditions meet the requirements for the antennas to operate at a high altitude and the personnel commissioning the antennas are trained to work at high altitudes.OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Commissioning Guide (U2000) 4 Site Commissioning Figure 4-11 Aligning the antenna with the first side lobe E 1 D D' 1 3 E 3 E' 2 D' D 1 2 E' 4. engineers need to align the main lobe by adjusting the azimuth and elevation of the antennas at both ends. 82 l Issue 01 (2011-10-30) . The AM function is disabled (its default status on the NE is Disabled). The Multimeter is calibrated. If the radio link is configured in 1+1 SD mode.

and align the diversity antennas at both ends. Retain the position of the main antenna at the remote end. Ensure that they are powered on during the alignment. adjust the elevation of the antenna to the horizontal position. CAUTION You can adjust the azimuth and elevation of the antennas by adjusting the appropriate nuts or screws. power off the standby ODUs. Power off the main ODUs. 2. 83 . power on the standby ODUs. Then. align the main antennas at both ends. Power on the main ODUs. Step 2 Connect a multimeter to the received signal strength indicator (RSSI) port on the ODU at the local end and test the voltage value VBNC. and adjust the diversity antenna at the local end. Ltd. TIP It is recommended that you make the test line terminated with a BNC connector at one end in advance. because it is more convenient for testing the voltage value VBNC.OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Commissioning Guide (U2000) 4 Site Commissioning 1. If the radio link is configured in 1+1 FD mode and two antennas are used at each end. 2.. Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. align the antenna in the following sequence: 1. Retain the position of the main antenna at the local end. Power on the standby ODU at the local end. and align the main antennas at both ends. 4. Procedure Step 1 Determine the azimuth of the antenna according to the installation position and height of the antenna. Then. Power off the standby ODUs at both ends. 3. For details. Power on the standby ODU at the remote end. l Power on the main ODUs at both ends. and adjust the diversity antenna at the remote end. see the installation guide for the antennas.

the tested signal peaks may be as follows: l Three signal peaks are tracked. Adjust the antenna to the peak position at point 2 as shown in Figure 4-10. When you rotate the antenna. for example. ensure that the VBNC voltage remains at the peak value. Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. Then. l One signal peak is tracked. adjust the azimuth of the antenna to the middle of points 6 and 7 as shown in Figure 4-10. Slightly adjust the elevation and azimuth at point 2 as shown in Figure 4-10 until VBNC reaches the peak within the tracked range. 84 . line CC' in Figure 4-10. l Two signal peaks are tracked. Adjust the antenna to the peak position at point 2 as shown in Figure 4-10. adjust the azimuth of the antenna to the peak position at point 2 as shown in Figure 4-10. In this case. for example.. line BB' in Figure 4-10. 2. NOTE When you tighten the antenna. rotate the antenna widely in the horizontal direction. adjust the azimuth of the antenna to the middle of points 4 and 5 as shown in Figure 4-10. 4. adjust the elevation of the antenna so that the three signal peaks in the case of line AA' can appear. In this case. fix the antenna at the local end. for example. Keep the remote antenna fixed. Adjust the antenna until the VBNC voltage reaches the peak value. Use the multimeter to measure VBNC. Ltd. In this case. line AA' in Figure 4-10.OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Commissioning Guide (U2000) 4 Site Commissioning Figure 4-12 Testing the RSSI voltage by using a multimeter Step 3 Adjust the azimuth and elevation of the antenna as follows: 1. 3. Then. Then. At the local end. adjust the elevation of the antenna so that the three signal peaks in the case of line AA' can appear.

----End 4.3 Aligning Dual-Polarized Antennas When aligning dual-polarized antennas.. and Materials l l l l Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Adjustable wrench Telescope Interphone Hex key Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. snow.OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Commissioning Guide (U2000) 4 Site Commissioning Step 4 Repeat Step 2 to Step 3 to adjust the antenna at the remote end. tighten the antennas at both ends Step 6 Use the multimeter to test VBNC at both ends. or fog On-site conditions meet the requirements for the antennas to operate at a high altitude and the personnel commissioning the antennas are trained to work at high altitudes. The ATPC function is disabled (its default status on the NE is Disabled). NOTE The curve diagram for VBNC and RSL is delivered along with the ODU. engineers need to align the main lobe by adjusting the azimuth and elevation of the antennas at both ends.5. NOTE Use the multimeter to measure the received value of RSSI again to ensure that no fault occurred in the process of tightening the screws. Tools. The weather at both stations is suitable for outdoor operations and there is no threat of rain. The AM function is disabled (its default status on the NE is Disabled). The ODU indicator should turn off. The actual RSL must be the same as the value planned by the network planning department. Obtain the current RSL by referring to the relationship curve between VBNC of ODUs and the RSLs at both ends. Step 5 Repeat Step 2 to Step 4 two to four times. NOTE l If VBNC does not meet the requirements. The Multimeter is calibrated. Equipment. When VBNC at the local end and VBNC at the remote end reach the peak value. Prerequisite l l l l l l The site commissioning of the radio equipment at both ends of the radio link is complete. Ltd. If the ODU indicator blinks yellow. Step 8 Tighten all the screws on the antennas. align the antennas. see the OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide for suggestion on how to handle the issue. 85 . When VBNC reaches the peak value. Step 7 Observe the ODU indicator on the IF board. Engineers also need to adjust the feed booms of the antennas so that the cross-polarization discrimination (XPD) meets the specified requirements. tighten the antenna at the remote end.

Ltd. and turn the OMT slightly until the signal level reaches the lower threshold.P2). Ensure that the antennas transmit horizontally polarized signals.5. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co.5.P2) should not be less than 30 dB. 86 Issue 01 (2011-10-30) . Then. Use the multimeter to measure the received signal levels of the ODUs in the vertical and horizontal polarization directions. and power on the horizontally polarized ODUs at both ends of the radio link. and check the XPD. and ensure that the main lobe of the horizontally polarized signals is aligned with the antenna. If. Use a multimeter to measure the signal level on the RSSI port of the horizontally polarized ODU. 1... Step 3 After aligning the antennas.. power on the ODUs in the vertical and horizontal polarization directions at both ends.2 Aligning Single-Polarized Antennas. NOTE Use the multimeter to measure the received value of RSSI. Proceed to Step 2 through Step 3. Avoid any fault in the alignment of antennas in the process of tightening the screws. 2. 4. Step 6 Measure the RSL (P3) of the horizontally polarized signals at the local end.. Tighten all the screws of the antennas. Proceed to Step 4 through Step 14. 3. For detailed operations.. The calculated XPD1 (XPD1 = P1 .P2) is The antenna alignment task is completed. Step 2 Adjust the antenna as a single-polarized antenna.P2) is Release the captive screws of the OMT to less than 30 dB. Step 5 Adjust the azimuth angle and elevation angle of the antennas at both ends by referring to 4. The ODUs are directly installed onto an OMT The ODUs are installed separately from the antenna Then. 1.. Calculate the XPD1 (XPD1 = P1 .. If. Obtain the received signal level in the horizontal polarization direction (P1) and the received signal level in the vertical polarization direction (P2) based on the curve delivered in the ODU carton. The calculated XPD1 (XPD1 = P1 .. not less than 30 dB. see 4.2 Aligning Single-Polarized Antennas. Step 4 Power off the vertically polarized ODUs at both ends of the radio link. some extent.OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Commissioning Guide (U2000) 4 Site Commissioning l l l Multimeter (with a BNC connector prepared at one end for future tests) North-stabilized indicator Spanner delivered with the OMT Procedure Step 1 Check the installation modes of the ODUs at both ends of the radio link.. The calculated XPD1 (XPD1 = P1 .

. and power on the vertically polarized ODUs at both ends of the radio link. 1. and ensure that the RSL of the vertically polarized signals reaches the lower threshold (P4).. Step 8 Record the angle (D1) of the current feed boom. Step 12 Record the angle (D2) of the current feed boom. Step 10 Measure the RSL (P5) of the vertically polarized signals at the local end by referring to Step 6. 4. Release the holder of the feed boom to some extent. Ltd. Power on the vertically polarized ODU at the local end. and ensure that the RSL of the vertically polarized signals reaches the lower threshold (P6). Proceed to the next step. If. Ensure that the antennas transmit vertically polarized signals. Step 13 Adjust the feed boom slightly (ranging from D1 to D2). The calculated XPD3 (XPD3 = P5 . If. Step 11 Adjust the feed boom at the local end. The calculated XPD1 (XPD2 = P3 . and ensure that XPD2 and XPD3 are not less than 30 dB. Calculate the XPD1 (XPD2 = P3 ... 3. 5. The calculated XPD2 (XPD2 = P3 . Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co.. Use a multimeter to measure the signal level on the RSSI port of the vertically polarized ODU. Calculate the RSL (P3) of the horizontally polarized received signals by referring to the curve diagram delivered along with the ODU. Release the holder of the feed boom to some extent. Step 9 Power off the horizontally polarized ODUs at both ends of the radio link. 5.. Power on the vertically polarized ODU at the local end. The calculated XPD2 (XPD2 = P3 . Calculate the RSL (P4) of the vertically polarized signals by referring to the curve diagram in the ODU box..P4) is not less than 30 dB Perform Step 8.P6). and turn the feed boom slightly until the signal level reaches the lower threshold. Calculate the RSL (P6) of the vertically polarized signals by referring to the curve diagram delivered along with the ODU. Proceed to the next step. The calculated XPD3 (XPD3 = P5 . 87 .P6) is not less than 30 dB Perform Step 12. and turn the feed boom slightly until the signal level reaches the lower threshold.OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Commissioning Guide (U2000) 4 Site Commissioning 2.P6) is less than 30 dB Then.P4) should not be less than 30 dB. 1. 2. The calculated XPD2 (XPD2 = P3 .P4). Use a multimeter to measure the signal level on the RSSI port of the vertically polarized ODU.P4) is less than 30 dB Then. 4.P4) should not be less than 30 dB.. Calculate the XPD3 (XPD3 = P5 . 3.. Step 7 Adjust the feed boom at the local end. 2.

you do not need to adjust the feed boom.6 Checking the Status of Radio Links After aligning the antennas. 1. Procedure Step 1 Observe the LINK indicator on the IF board. If the LINK indicator on the IF board is on (green). Step 14 Tighten all the screws on the antennas. you can align dual-polarized antennas by measuring only the vertically polarized signals. 4. Ltd. NOTE Use the multimeter to measure the received value of RSSI again to ensure that no fault occurred in the process of tightening the screws.OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Commissioning Guide (U2000) NOTE 4 Site Commissioning If D1 and D2 are the same. ----End Related Information In practice. query the status of radio links and determine whether the radio links are in the normal state. 88 Issue 01 (2011-10-30) STAT SRV LINK ODU RMT ACT . Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. Prerequisite The antennas have been aligned.. it indicates that the radio link is in the normal state.

----End 4. click Query.. Ltd. you can determine whether the DCN of the radio links runs properly. By querying the radio links using the Search For Opposite NE.OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Commissioning Guide (U2000) 4 Site Commissioning 2.7 Querying the DCN Status The NMS manages NEs through DCN channels. If the LINK indicator on the IF board is on (red). On the Opposite NE List. Equipment. 89 . You must be an NM user with NE maintainer authority or higher. NOTE If basic information about the opposite NEs in a certain microwave direction is not displayed. Tools. check whether the data configuration of the ODU is correct and whether the antennas are aligned. ----End Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. and Materials Web LCT Procedure Step 1 Select an NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Step 2 In the Search For Opposite NE tab. check the configurations in that microwave direction. Prerequisite l l l The basic data of NEs on the entire network has been configured. The antennas have been aligned. and choose Communication > Search For Opposite NE from the Function Tree. basic information about opposite NEs in all microwave directions is displayed.

6 Testing Protection Switching By testing protection switching. Ltd.4 Testing ATM Services By testing ATM services. you can determine whether the protection switching is normal over radio links. 5.3 Testing Ethernet Services By testing Ethernet services. The Ethernet services can be tested using the ETH-OAM function. 5. 5. 5. Therefore. you can check whether the E1 services are available over radio links. no tester is required.7 Checking the Clock Status Check the clock status for each NE to ensure that the clocks of all the NEs on a radio network are synchronized. 5. 5. you can check whether ATM services are available over radio links.9 Testing 24-Hour BER Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co.5 Testing AM Switching By testing AM switching.1 Configuring Networkwide Service Data After site commissioning is performed for each hop of the radio links. In this case. 5. you can determine whether the AM switching is normal over radio links. Therefore. 90 . 5.. you can check whether the Ethernet services are available over radio links.OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Commissioning Guide (U2000) 5 System Commissioning 5 About This Chapter System Commissioning System commissioning includes the specific commissioning processes for all system commissioning items. no tester is required. 5. The ATM services can be tested using the ATM OAM function.8 Testing the FM over a Radio Link The fade margin (FM) over a radio link can be evaluated by measuring the mean square errors (MSEs) at different received signal levels (RSLs). and the networkwide service data can be configured. the ECC communication between NEs is normal.2 Testing E1 Services By testing E1 services. an NE can be accessed by using the U2000.

Ltd..OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Commissioning Guide (U2000) 5 System Commissioning You can check whether the equipment can transmit services stably for a long term by testing 24-hour BER. Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. 91 .

2. Prerequisite l l The NMS must have proper communication with NEs. Ltd.. Perform Step 8 to Step 10.OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Commissioning Guide (U2000) 5 System Commissioning 5. or the NSAP addresses. TDM services. Step 3 Select Search Mode. it is recommended that you set Search Mode to Search for NE. Click Add.1 Creating NEs by Using the Search Method The U2000 can find all NEs that communicate with a specific gateway NE by using the IP address of the gateway NE. NOTE l If the U2000 server and the gateway NE are in the same network segment.1 Configuring Networkwide Service Data After site commissioning is performed for each hop of the radio links. Search Mode is set to Search for NE Search Mode is set to IP auto discovery Then. and then the Input Search Domain dialog box is displayed. it is recommended that you set Search Mode to IP auto discovery. Tools. 92 . you need to add a search domain. this method is faster and more reliable.. and the networkwide service data can be configured... Select an address type and enter the search address. In this case. Step 2 Select Transport NE Search tab. You must be an NM user with NE operator authority or higher. an NE can be accessed by using the U2000. In addition. the ECC communication between NEs is normal. If. 1. For more configuration tasks. Perform Step 4 to Step 7. Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. l In other scenarios.. Step 4 If Search Mode is set to Search for NE. the IP address range of the gateway NE. 5. and clocks. Equipment.1. Compared with the method of manually creating NEs. the U2000 can create the NEs that are found in batches. and Materials U2000 Procedure Step 1 Choose File > Discovery > NE from the Main Menu. see the configuration guide. NOTE This section only includes the basic configuration tasks related to NEs.

Click OK. 93 . l You can select either Create NE after search or Upload after Create or both Create NE after search and Upload after Create.. Step 6 In the Search for NE dialog box. l When Address Type is set to IP Address of GNE or IP Address Range of GNE. and the U2000 server and gateway NE are not in the same network segment. the system automatically creates an NE and uploads the NE. ensure that the OSI protocol stack software is installed on the U2000. Step 9 Click Next to navigate to the search interface. after the NE searching is complete. enter NE User and Password. Step 7 Click Next. Step 5 Repeat Step 4 to add several search domains. Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. perform the operations described in the Note part. ensure that the IP routes of the network segments to which the U2000 server and gateway NE belong are configured on the U2000 and related routers. After the search is complete. In this manner. Step 8 If Search Mode is set to IP auto discovery. 3. you need to specify NE User and Password.OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Commissioning Guide (U2000) 5 System Commissioning NOTE l When Address Type is set to NSAP Address. NOTE l If Create NE after search is selected. and then the Transport NE Search dialog box is displayed. Ltd. all the NEs that are found are displayed in the Result list.

4. Step 5 Specify New ID and New Extended ID. 94 .1 Parameter Description: NE Searching 5. Click OK. Click Create. 3. click Yes. 2. ----End Related References A. Prerequisite You must be an NM user with NE operator authority or higher. Tools. 1. Optional: Select the GNE ID of the NE. Ltd. The icon of the created NE is displayed in the Main Topology. right-click the NE whose ID needs to be changed. In the dialog box that is displayed. The Create dialog box is displayed.2 Changing the NE ID Change the NE ID according to the engineering plan to guarantee that each NE ID is unique. Step 2 Choose Object Attributes. Select an NE that is not created from the Result list. This operation task does not interrupt services. Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co.. Step 11 Create NEs. Step 4 Click Modify NE ID. click Stop. NOTE xxx indicates the current name of the NE. Step 3 Click the NE Attribute[xxx] tab. Equipment. The Modify NE ID dialog box is displayed. Specify User Name and Password. and Materials U2000 Procedure Step 1 In the Main Topology.1. The Attribute dialog box is displayed. Step 12 Optional: Repeat Step 11 to create other NEs that are not created.OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Commissioning Guide (U2000) 5 System Commissioning Step 10 After the NE to be created is displayed in Result. 5.

and Materials U2000 Procedure Step 1 In the Main Topology. Tools.OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Commissioning Guide (U2000) 5 System Commissioning Step 6 Click OK. The Attributes dialog box is displayed. A dialog box is displayed for confirmation. select the NE whose name is to be changed. ----End 5. and the subnet mask. 95 . Equipment. NOTE xxx is the current name of the NE. click OK. Step 4 Enter the name of the NE in Name. Prerequisite You must be an NM user with NE operator authority or higher. name the NE according to the NE geographical location or the device connected to the NE. ----End Related References A.4 Setting NE Communication Parameters The communication parameters of an NE include the IP address of the NE. Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co.3 Changing the NE Name To better identify the NE in the Main Topology. Step 2 Right-click on this NE. The new name of the NE is displayed below the NE icon in the Main Topology. Step 5 Click OK.1. NOTE The name of an NE cannot contain any space or characters. the gateway IP address. Step 3 Click the NE Attribute [xxx] tab. Step 7 Click OK. and then choose Object Attributes from the shortcut menu. Close the dialog box indicating the operation result.4 Parameter Description: Attribute_Changing NE IDs 5..1. Ltd.

96 .OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Commissioning Guide (U2000) 5 System Commissioning Prerequisite You must be an NM user with NE operator authority or higher. Ltd. click Apply for each instance.5 Configuring the Logical Board If the logical board corresponding to the physical board is not added in the slot layout. Choose Communication > Communication Parameters from the Function Tree. Step 2 Configure the communication parameters of the NE.1.. delete the inconsistent logical board and add the correct logical board. Tools.5 Parameter Description: NE Communication Parameter Setting 5. Step 3 Click Apply. NOTE If configuring multiple parameters. Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. add the logical board in the slot layout. Equipment. Close the displayed dialog box. ----End Related References A. and Materials U2000 Procedure Step 1 Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. If the physical board is inconsistent with the logical board in the slot layout.

orderwire. right-click. NOTE Before deleting the board. such as the service. and Materials U2000 Procedure Step 1 Double-click the NE icon to open the NE layout diagram. click OK.OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Commissioning Guide (U2000) 5 System Commissioning Prerequisite l l You must be an NM user with NE operator authority or higher. Ltd. Tools.6 Creating an IF 1+1 Protection Group If the radio link requires 1+1 HSB/FD/SD protection. ----End 5. 1. on the board. Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. and then choose Delete.1. Equipment. right-click. Step 3 Optional: On the slot to which the board is to be deleted. clock. 2. create the IF 1+1 protection group. delete the data. All the boards must be installed correctly. and then choose Add XXX.. In the displayed confirmation dialog box. and protection. In the dialog box that is displayed again for confirmation. NOTE XXX is the name of the board to be added. click OK. 97 . Step 2 Optional: On the slot to which the board is to be added.

Click the IF/ODU Configuration tab. The Create IF 1+1 Protection dialog box is displayed.OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Commissioning Guide (U2000) 5 System Commissioning Prerequisite l l l You must be an NM user with NE operator authority or higher. select the NE and then choose Configuration > Link Configuration from the Function Tree. Step 4 Configure the parameters of the IF 1+1 protection group. In the NE Explorer. Changes the values of IF Service Type for the main and standby IF boards according to the network plan. 1. the default value of IF Service Type is Hybrid(Native E1+ETH). Tools. 3. l For ISU2 or ISX2 boards. Ltd. Step 2 Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. 4. the original service is not interrupted. Equipment. Step 3 Click Create. 98 . set IF Service Type to appropriate values for the main and standby IF boards according to the network plan. NOTE l Ensure that the values of IF Service Type set for the main and standby IF boards are the same and meet the network plan requirements. The IF boards of an IF 1+1 FD/SD protection group must be configured in two paired slots. Choose Configuration > IF 1+1 Protection from the Function Tree.. and Materials U2000 Background Information When a 1+0 service is converted into a 1+1 HSB protection configuration by configuring the IF 1+1 protection group. The board that carries the original service. Click Apply. 2. The IF boards and the ODUs to which the IF boards are connected must be added on the NE Panel. needs to be set as the working board. Procedure Step 1 For an IF 1+1 protection group comprised of ISU2 or ISX2 boards. however. Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co.

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Commissioning Guide (U2000) NOTE 5 System Commissioning l When Working Mode is set to HSB. if Working Mode is set to HSB. you can configure the IF/ODU information for a radio link.. l Enable Reverse Switching is valid only when Working Mode is set to HSB or SD. With SD protection. In this case. It is recommended that you use the default value.7 Configuring the IF/ODU Information of a Radio Link By performing this operation. Step 5 Click OK. Ltd. to receive the same signal. the impact of the fading on signal transmission is reduced. l Each of the parameters Working Mode. l When Revertive Mode is set to Non-Revertive. l Generally. ----End Related References A. protection group alarms are reported to indicate radio link faults. and Materials U2000 Precautions l For 1+1 HSB/SD protection. Prerequisite l l You must be an NM user with NE operator authority or higher. With FD protection. the NE that is in the switching state releases the switching and enables the former working channel to return to the normal state some time after the former working channel is restored to normal. The equipment selects signals from the two received signals. WTR Time(s). it is recommended that you set Enable Reverse Switching to Enabled. The IF boards and the ODUs to which the IF boards are connected must be added on the NE Panel. to transmit and receive the same signal. the equipment provides a 1+1 hot standby configuration for the IF board and ODU at both ends of each hop of a radio link to realize the protection. Close the displayed operation result dialog box. it is recommended that you set Enable Reverse Switching to Disabled.9 Parameter Description: IF 1+1 Protection_Create 5.Anti-jitter Time(s) and Enable Reverse Switching must be set to the same value at both ends of a radio hop. Tools. l When Working Mode is set to FD. the system uses two channels that have a frequency spacing between them. the system uses two antennas that have a space distance between them. if Working Mode is set to SD. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. l You can set WTR Time(s) only when Revertive Mode is set to Revertive Mode. 99 Issue 01 (2011-10-30) . l When Revertive Mode is set to Revertive Mode. Revertive Mode. the NE that is in the switching state keeps the current state unchanged unless another switching occurs even though the former working channel is restored to normal. Equipment.1. you need to configure only the IF/ODU information of the main radio link. It is recommended that you set this parameter to Revertive Mode. l It is recommended that Anti-jitter Time(s) take its default value. The remote end selects signals from the two received signals. l When Working Mode is set to SD. l It is recommended that you set Alarm Report Mode to Only protection group alarms. the impact of the fading on signal transmission is reduced.

set IF Service Type appropriately for the ISU2 and ISX2 boards before configuring IF 1+1 protection. Set other IF information. 2. l For ISU2 and ISX2 boards. Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. and XPIC. services may be configured unsuccessfully or interrupted. The MW_CFG_MISMATCH alarm is reported.OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Commissioning Guide (U2000) 5 System Commissioning l l l l For 1+1 FD protection. Step 2 Click the IF/ODU Configuration tab. The system displays the IF/ODU information of the radio link that the IF board or ODU connected to the IF board belongs to. you need to configure the IF/ODU information of the N+1 radio links respectively. if the E1 count. or modulation mode is set inconsistently for both ends of an Integrated IP radio link. Before configuring XPIC workgroups. STM-1 count. 100 . Procedure Step 1 In the NE Explorer. Step 3 Click an IF board icon or ODU icon. select the NE and then choose Configuration > Link Configuration from the Function Tree. N+1 protection. Click Apply. For N+1 protection. Otherwise. This alarm should be cleared immediately.. Optional: For ISU2/ISX2 boards. Step 4 Configure the corresponding IF information of the radio link. set IF Service Type according to the network plan. NOTE l After this operation. you need to set IF Service Type separately for IF boards in the vertical polarization and those in horizontal polarization. AM enabled status. Set other IF information after the IF board starts up. Ltd. you need to configure the IF/ODU information of the main radio link and the ODU information of the standby radio link. the IF board will be reset. 1.

The following procedure describes the ATPC parameter configurations in the IF port configuration dialog box for the IF board.OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Commissioning Guide (U2000) NOTE 5 System Commissioning l Link ID is set according to the network plan. The corresponding IF board must be added on the NE Panel. the value of this parameter is determined by the bandwidth of the services that need to be transmitted over the Hybrid radio and the availability of the radio link that corresponds to this modulation scheme.10 Parameter: Link Configuration_IF/ODU Configuration 5. In this case. Generally. you need to select Manually Specified Modulation Mode.8 Configuring ATPC Attributes To configure the ATPC function. Each radio link of an NE should have a unique link ID. Step 6 Configure the corresponding ODU information of the radio link. l Modulation Mode of the Full AM Capacity specifies the highest-order modulation scheme that the AM function supports. it is recommended that you set TX Status to unmute. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. Ltd. Prerequisite l l You must be an NM user with NE operator authority or higher. This parameter is set according to the network plan.. l When AM Enable Status is set to Enabled. After this parameter is set. l Modulation Mode of the Guarantee AM Capacity specifies the lowest-order modulation scheme that the AM function supports. the antenna misalignment indicating function is disabled. the NE automatically enables the antenna misalignment indicating function. NOTE l Power to Be Received(dBm) is used to set the expected receive power of the ODU and is mainly used in the antenna alignment stage. ----End Related References A. Step 7 Click Apply. l When AM Enable Status is set to Disabled. This parameter is set according to the network plan. Generally. set the ATPC attributes of the IF board. the radio link uses only the specified modulation scheme.0). the radio link uses the corresponding modulation scheme according to the channel conditions. Precautions l l For the IF boards that are configured with 1+1 protection. and the link IDs at both ends of a radio link should be the same.1. l Modulation Mode of the Full AM Capacity must be higher than Modulation Mode of the Guarantee AM Capacity. Step 5 Click Apply. l In normal cases. You can also configure ATPC parameters in the Create XPIC Protection Group window. 101 Issue 01 (2011-10-30) . l When Power to Be Received(dBm) takes the default value (-10. configure only the ATPC attributes of the main IF board. the value of this parameter is determined by the service transmission bandwidth that the Hybrid radio must ensure and the availability of the radio link that corresponds to this modulation scheme.

l In the case of areas where fast fading severely affects the radio transmission. you can record the exact time when alarms and abnormal events occur. Step 4 Click Apply. Equipment. and Materials U2000 Procedure Step 1 Choose Configuration > NE Batch Configuration > NE Time Synchronization from the Main Menu. When you need to synchronize the NE time with the time on the NTP server. Choose Configuration > IF Interface from the Function Tree. l If ATPC Automatic Threshold Enable Status is set to Enabled. the time on the NTP server must be set correctly and the NTP protocol must be normal. the equipment automatically uses the preset ATPC upper and lower thresholds according to the work mode of the radio link. and ATPC Lower Threshold(dBm) to the difference between the planned central value between the ATPC upper threshold and the ATPC lower threshold and 10 dB. the time zone and time must be set correctly on the PC or server running the NMS software. l If ATPC Automatic Threshold Enable Status is set to Disabled. Step 2 Click the ATPC Attributes tab.OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Commissioning Guide (U2000) 5 System Commissioning Tools. Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. ----End 5. you need to manually set ATPC Upper Automatic Threshold(dBm) and ATPC Lower Automatic Threshold(dBm). Ltd. and Materials U2000 Procedure Step 1 Select the corresponding board from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. When you need to synchronize the NE time with the time on the NMS server. Step 3 Set the parameters of ATPC attributes. l It is recommended that you set ATPC Upper Threshold(dBm) to the sum of the planned central value between the ATPC upper threshold and the ATPC lower threshold and 10 dB.9 Synchronizing the NE Time By setting the NE time to be synchronous with the time on the NMS or standard NTP server. Tools. Equipment. NOTE l The settings of the ATPC attributes must be consistent at both ends of a radio link.1. it is recommended that you set ATPC Enable Status to Disabled. Prerequisite l l l You must be an NM user with NE operator authority or higher. 102 ..

set Synchronous Mode to NM. Step 3 In the physical view.. Close the displayed operation result dialog box. 4. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. Click Apply. Configure the upper-layer NTP server. d. Click Apply. and then click . l When you need to synchronize the NE time with the time on the NTP server. a dialog box is displayed indicating that the operation is successful. Step 5 When you need to synchronize the NE time with the NMS time. 4. a. 2. The dialog box that is displayed indicating the operation result is closed. set the time synchronization mode and the related parameters. Configure Standard NTP Authentication according to the requirements of the NTP server. NOTE Click Apply. Configure Standard NTP Authentication according to the requirements of the NTP server. click Yes. a. c. right-click in the configuration box where the standard NTP server is configured. Close the displayed operation result dialog box. Set Synchronous Mode to Standard NTP. 2.OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Commissioning Guide (U2000) 5 System Commissioning Step 2 Click the NE Time Synchronization tab. c. click Yes. set the time synchronization mode and the related parameters. Click Close. Select the NE. a. Set Synchronous Mode to NM. and then choose Synchronize with NM Time from the shortcut menu. 1. Optional: The NE time is synchronized with the NMS time immediately. Step 6 When you need to synchronize the NE time with the time on the NTP server. Step 4 After the operation is complete. In the displayed confirmation dialog box. 5. set Synchronous Mode to Standard NTP. Set auto synchronization parameters. Right-click the NE whose time needs to be synchronized. select the NE whose time needs to be synchronized. Ltd. In the displayed confirmation dialog box. 3. l When you need to synchronize the NE time with the NMS time. Click Close. 1. 3. and then choose New. b. 103 Issue 01 (2011-10-30) . b. Optional: Set auto synchronization parameters.

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Commissioning Guide (U2000) 5 System Commissioning b. ----End Select the NE to be copied. right-click. Before the copy operation.. and then choose Copy Standard NTP Server. Ltd. Close the displayed operation result dialog box. Close the displayed operation result dialog box. NOTE Optional: Copy the configuration of the upper-layer NTP server.12 Parameter Description: NE Time Synchronization Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. d. c. click Yes. 104 . 6. right-click. Configure the parameters related to the NTP server. Select the NE to be pasted. c. In the displayed confirmation dialog box. b. Click Apply. and then choose Paste Standard NTP Server. d. a. Related References A. set Synchronous Mode to Standard NTP for the source NE and the target NE.

Step 5 Click OK. Step 4 Configure the parameters of a new SDH service. and Materials U2000 Procedure Step 1 Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Close the displayed dialog box. Equipment. Choose Configuration > SDH Service Configuration from the Function Tree. Step 2 Click Options to change the VC-12 timeslot numbering policy used by the cross-connection. The corresponding source and sink boards must be added on NE Panel.12 Parameter Description: NE Time Synchronization 5. Step 3 Click Create. ----End Related References A. Prerequisite l l You must be an NM user with NE operator authority or higher.OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Commissioning Guide (U2000) 5 System Commissioning A..1. 105 . one service source corresponds to one service sink.13 Parameter Description: SDH Service Configuration_Creation Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. Tools.10 Creating the Cross-Connections of Point-to-Point Services In a cross-connection of point-to-point services. Ltd. The Create SDH Service dialog box is displayed.

1. The Add Clock Source dialog box is displayed.OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Commissioning Guide (U2000) 5 System Commissioning 5. Step 5 Click OK. The internal clock source is always of the lowest priority. Choose Configuration > Clock > Physical Clock > Clock Source Priority.. Ltd. Tools. Step 3 Click Create. Prerequisite You must be an NM user with NE operator authority or higher. Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. Step 7 Optional: Select a clock source and click clock source. TIP Hold the Ctrl key on the keyboard to select multiple clock sources. and Materials U2000 Procedure Step 1 Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. NOTE or to adjust the priority of this The clock priorities levels are arranged in a descending order from the first row to the last row.11 Configuring the Clock Sources This topic describes how to configure the clock source according to the planned clock synchronization scheme to ensure that all the NEs on the network trace the same clock. Equipment. Step 2 Click the System Clock Source Priority List tab. Step 4 Select the clock sources. Step 6 Optional: Repeat Step 3 to Step 5 to add other clock sources. 106 . Step 8 Optional: Set External Clock Source Mode and Synchronous Status Byte for the external clock sources.

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Commissioning Guide (U2000)

5 System Commissioning

Step 9 Click Apply. ----End

Related References
A.14 Parameter Description: Clock Source Priority Table

5.1.12 Configuring Orderwire
The orderwire for an NE provides a dedicated communication channel that the network maintenance personnel can use.

Prerequisite
You must be an NM user with NE operator authority or higher.

Tools, Equipment, and Materials
U2000

Procedure
Step 1 Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > Orderwire from the Function Tree. Step 2 Click the General tab. Step 3 Configure the orderwire information.

Step 4 Click Apply. Step 5 Optional: Change the overhead bytes occupied by the orderwire. 1. 2.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Click the Advanced tab. Configure Orderwire Occupied Bytes.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 107

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Commissioning Guide (U2000)

5 System Commissioning

3.

Click Apply.

----End

Related References
A.15 Parameter Description: Orderwire_General A.16 Parameter Description: Orderwire_Advanced

5.2 Testing E1 Services
By testing E1 services, you can check whether the E1 services are available over radio links.
NOTE

l It is recommended that you test low-priority Ethernet services in good weather conditions, where the AM function works in the highest-efficiency modulation mode. l The tested E1 services can be Native E1 services or CES E1 services.

5.2.1 Testing E1 Services by Using a BER Tester
If a BER tester is available, the BER tester can be used to test E1 services.

Prerequisite
The NE must be configured with E1 services, and the E1 services must be transmitted through the DDF.

Tools, Equipment, and Materials
l l U2000 BER tester
NOTE

For a test of CES services in CESoPSN mode, a BER tester supporting Nx64 Kbit/s timeslot setting is necessary.

Procedure
Step 1 On the DDF at the central site, connect the BER tester to the first E1 port of the IDU. The BER tester indicates the AIS alarm.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

108

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Commissioning Guide (U2000)

5 System Commissioning

Figure 5-1 Connecting the BER tester
DDF
RX TX

RX

TX

. . . .

1 2 3 4

BER tester

Step 2 On the NMS, perform an inloop for the corresponding E1 port at the remote site. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. Select the PDH interface board in the Object Tree. In the Function Tree, choose Configuration > PDH Interface. Select By Function and select Tributary Loopback from the drop-down menu. In Tributary Loopback, select Inloop. Click Apply. The Confirm dialog box is displayed. Click OK. The Confirm dialog box is displayed. Click OK. The Operation Result dialog box is displayed. Click Close. Step 3 Test the bit errors for two minutes. There should be no bit errors.
NOTE

For a test of CES services, it is necessary to configure 64 Kbit/s timeslots on a BER tester to align with the timeslots carrying CES services.

Step 4 Release the inloop set in Step 2. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. Select the PDH interface board in the Object Tree. In the Function Tree, choose Configuration > PDH Interface. Select By Function and select Tributary Loopback from the drop-down menu. In Tributary Loopback, select Non-Loopback. Click Apply. The Confirm dialog box is displayed. Click OK. The Confirm dialog box is displayed. Click OK. The Operation Result dialog box is displayed.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 109

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Commissioning Guide (U2000)

5 System Commissioning

8.

Click Close.

Step 5 Repeat Step 1 through Step 4 to test all other E1 ports. ----End

5.2.2 Testing E1 Services Using PRBS
If no BER tester is available, you can test E1 services by using the PRBS test system embedded in the equipment.

Prerequisite
l l The NE must be configured with E1 services, and the E1 services must be transmitted through the DDF. The communication between the NMS and the NE must be normal.

Tools, Equipment, and Materials
U2000

Precautions

CAUTION
l When a PRBS test is performed, the services carried on the tested path are interrupted. l The PRBS test can be performed only in a unidirectional manner and on one path at a time. l CES services do not support a PRBS test.

Procedure
Step 1 On the NMS, perform an inloop for the corresponding E1 port at the remote site. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. Select the PDH interface board in the Object Tree. In the Function Tree, choose Configuration > PDH Interface. Select By Function and select Tributary Loopback from the drop-down menu. In Tributary Loopback, select Inloop. Click Apply. The Confirm dialog box is displayed. Click OK. The Confirm dialog box is displayed. Click OK. The Operation Result dialog box is displayed. Click Close.

Step 2 At the central site, on the NMS, select the PDH interface board in the Object Tree. Step 3 In the Function Tree, choose Configuration > PRBS Test.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 110

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Commissioning Guide (U2000)

5 System Commissioning

Step 4 Select the first E1 port, and then set the following PRBS-related parameters: l Direction: Cross l Duration: a value from 120 to 180 l Measured in Time: seconds

Step 5 Click Start to Test. The system displays a dialog box indicating The operation may interrupt the service, are you sure to continue? Step 6 Click OK. Step 7 When the Progress column is 100%, click Query to check the test result. The curve diagram should be green. Step 8 Release the inloop set in Step 1. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. Select the PDH interface board in the Object Tree. In the Function Tree, choose Configuration > PDH Interface. Select By Function and select Tributary Loopback from the drop-down menu. In Tributary Loopback, select Non-Loopback. Click Apply. The Confirm dialog box is displayed. Click OK. The Confirm dialog box is displayed. Click OK. The Operation Result dialog box is displayed. Click Close.

Step 9 Repeat Step 1 through Step 8 to test all other E1 ports. ----End

5.3 Testing Ethernet Services
By testing Ethernet services, you can check whether the Ethernet services are available over radio links. The Ethernet services can be tested using the ETH-OAM function. Therefore, no tester is required.

Prerequisite
Ethernet services must be configured.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 111

3. The New Maintenance Domain dialog box is displayed.The three Ethernet ports are not on the EMS6/EFP8 boards. Procedure Step 1 Configure the maintenance domains of NE1. you can still perform the following steps to test the Ethernet services by eliminating the need to set up the remote maintenance end point.OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Commissioning Guide (U2000) NOTE 5 System Commissioning l It is recommended that you test low-priority Ethernet services in good weather conditions when the AM function works in the highest-efficiency modulation mode. the operations on the NMS are different. or Ethernet services carried by PWs. Choose Configuration > Ethernet OAM Management > Ethernet Service OAM Management from the Function Tree. l The tested Ethernet services can be Native Ethernet services. see Creating MDs. Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. 1. and Materials U2000 Test Connection Diagram The following test procedure considers the Ethernet service from PORT2 on NE2 and PORT3 on NE3 to PORT1 on NE1 as an example. l Maintenance Domain Name: MD1 for NE1. EoS/EoPDH services. Choose New > New Maintenance Domain. and Performing an LB Test. Tools. and NE3 Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. NE2. Creating MPs. as shown in Figure 5-2. NE2. 112 . Figure 5-2 Networking diagram for testing Ethernet services NE 2 PORT 2 VLAN ID=100 PORT 1 NE 1 NE 3 Microwave network PORT 3 VLAN ID=200 The VLAN ID of the Ethernet service from NE2 to NE1 is 100.. NOTE If the Ethernet ports are on the EMS6/EFP8 boards. Ltd. 2. and NE3. Configure the parameters of the new maintenance domains. For details. Equipment. Creating MAs. and the VLAN ID of the Ethernet service from NE3 to NE1 is 200. In addition.

The New Maintenance Association dialog box is displayed. and 103 for NE3 l Direction: Ingress for NE1. Choose New > New MEP Point. Choose New > New Maintenance Association. NE2. NE2. Choose Configuration > Ethernet OAM Management > Ethernet Service OAM Management from the Function Tree. Ltd. and NE3 l CC Status: activation for NE1. Click OK to close the displayed dialog box. 3. Select the maintenance association in which an MEP needs to be created. Configure the parameters of the new maintenance associations. and NE3. and NE3 Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. 4. 2.. Choose Configuration > Ethernet OAM Management > Ethernet Service OAM Management from the Function Tree. 113 . Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. 4. and select associated services in the New Maintenance Association dialog box. Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. NE2. l MP ID: 101 for NE1. The system displays the New MEP Point dialog box. 1. l Maintenance Association Name: MA1 for NE1. Select the maintenance domain in which a maintenance association needs to be created. 2. NE2. Click the Maintenance Association tab. Step 2 Configure the maintenance associations of NE1. Configure the parameters of the new MEPs. NE2. 1. 4. and NE3. 3. Click OK to close the displayed dialog box. NE2. Step 3 Configure the MEPs of NE1. 102 for NE2. and NE3 NOTE The maintenance domain names and the maintenance domain levels of the NEs must be the same.OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Commissioning Guide (U2000) 5 System Commissioning l Maintenance Domain Level: 4 for NE1. and NE3 l Relevant Service: services from NE1 to NE2 and NE3 NOTE Click in Relevant Service.

Click OK to close the displayed dialog box. Click the Maintenance Association tab. Choose OAM > Manage Remote MEP Point. 3.. 1. Select an NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer of the NE1. 2. Choose Configuration > Ethernet OAM Management > Ethernet Service OAM Management from the Function Tree. the Add Maintenance Association Remote Maintenance Point dialog box is displayed. l Remote Maintenance Point ID: 102 and 103 for NE1. Step 4 Configure the remote MEPs for the maintenance associations of NE1. Click New. and set the Remote Maintenance Point ID of NE2 and NE3 to the MP ID of NE1. click OAM. NE2. Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Step 5 Test the availability of the Ethernet services from NE1 to NE2 and NE3.OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Commissioning Guide (U2000) 5 System Commissioning 5. and 101 for NE2 and NE3 NOTE Set the Remote Maintenance Point ID of NE1 to the MP ID of NE2 and NE3. Click OK to close the displayed dialog box. The LB Test window is displayed. Select Destination Maintenance Point ID. MA. and MEP that correspond to Port 1. and set the parameters in Test Node. 6. The Manage Remote MEP Point dialog box is displayed. 5. Then. 4. 3. Ltd. 1. 2. and then choose Configuration > Ethernet OAM Management > Ethernet Service OAM. 114 . 4. Set the parameters of the new remote MEPs. and NE3. l Source Maintenance Point ID: 101 (maintenance point ID of NE1) l Destination Maintenance Point ID: 102 (maintenance point ID of NE2) l Transmitted Packet Count: 20 (recommended) Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. Select the MD. Select Start LB.

7.4 Testing ATM Services By testing ATM services. you can check whether ATM services are available over radio links.. The LossRate in the Detection Result should be 0. Ltd. The ATM services can be tested using the ATM OAM function. 512. and the parameter can also be set to 128. Prerequisite l Issue 01 (2011-10-30) End-to-end ATM services must be configured. 256.) NOTE The maximum Packet Length is 1400. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. 115 .6 to test the Ethernet services from NE1 to NE3. no tester is required. ----End 5. l Transmitted Packet Priority: 7 (recommended) 5. l Source Maintenance Point ID: 101 (maintenance point ID of NE1) l Destination Maintenance Point ID: 103 (maintenance point ID of NE3) l Transmitted Packet Count: 20 (recommended) l Transmitted Packet Length: 64 (recommended) l Transmitted Packet Priority: 7 (recommended) The LossRate in the Detection Result should be 0. Therefore. Repeat Step 5. and 1280 for testing the Ethernet services of different packet lengths.OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Commissioning Guide (U2000) 5 System Commissioning l Transmitted Packet Length: 64 (64 is a recommended value. 1024.4 to Step 5. Check Detection Result. 6. Click Start Test.

The method for testing the ATM services over multiple radio link hops is the same. When Segment End Attribute is set to Endpoint. l l When Segment End Attribute is set to Segment point. 116 . Equipment. and Materials U2000 Background Information When an LB test is performed on the ATM service. Ltd. the segment and end attribute is set to specify the types of transmitted ATM OAM cells. segment LB cells are transmitted.. end-to-end LB cells are transmitted. The services of the boards on the NE1 and NE2 are configured as follows: Attribute UNI Service source Bound port NE A 3-MD1-1 (Trunk-1) 3-MD1-1 (Port-1) 3-MD1-2 (Port-2) VPI VCI NNI PW ID Service source Bound port VPI VCI 1 51 1 101 501 NE B 3-MD1-1 (Trunk-1) 3-MD1-1 (Port-1) 3-MD1-2 (Port-2) 101 501 1 101 501 Figure 5-3 Connection diagram for testing the connectivity of the ATM service UNI VPI 1 VCI 51 NNI VPI 101 VCI 501 VPI 101 NNI VCI 501 UNI VPI 101 VCI 501 NodeB NE A NE B RNC Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co.OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Commissioning Guide (U2000) 5 System Commissioning l You must be an NM user with NE operator authority or higher. Test Connection Diagram This example shows how to test the ATM service over a radio link hop. Figure 5-3 shows the test connection diagram. Tools. NE A and NE B are the OptiX RTN 950.

Click the LLID tab. If the default LLID is unique on a network. Step 4 Test the ATM service from NE B to NE A. Test Result should be Test succeeded. Then. Click the Remote Loopback Test tab. In normal situations. and choose the ATM service to be tested. 1. 3. 5. select NE A and then choose Configuration > ATM OAM Management from the Function Tree. and choose the ATM service to be tested. l Set NE Code to 00 09 78 02 00 00 00 00 00 00 00. NOTE Step 2 Set the identifier at the loopback point from NE A to NE B. Click the Segment and End Attribute tab. Click Apply. 1.. set Segment and End Attribute to Segment point. 2. l Set NE Code to 00 09 78 01 00 00 00 00 00 00 00. Set the parameters of NE B as follows: l Set Country Code to 00 86. Click the Remote Loopback Test tab. Select NE B from the NE Explorer. Issue 01 (2011-10-30) With reference of Step 1. 3. Set Loopback Point NE of the ATM service to be tested to NE B. 4. Set the parameters of NE A as follows: l Set Country Code to 00 86. 3. 4. As for NE A and NE B. 2. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. l Set Network Code to 00 16. 5. and NE Code. If the test is not successful. the default LLID can also be used. Click Apply. set Connection Direction to Sink. 3. As for NE A and NE B. Click Test to start an LB test. In the NE Explorer. see Maintenance Guide and rectify the fault based on the test result. Ltd. 2. and choose the ATM service to be tested. In the NE Explorer. set Connection Direction of NE A to Sink. 1. Set Country Code. select an NE and then choose Configuration > ATM OAM Management from the Function Tree. In the NE Explorer. choose Configuration > ATM OAM Management from the Function Tree. select an NE and then choose Configuration > ATM OAM Management from the Function Tree. 1. Network Code. 2. Step 3 Test the ATM service from NE A to NE B. set Connection Direction of NE B to Source. Click Close. 4. l Set Network Code to 00 16.OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Commissioning Guide (U2000) 5 System Commissioning Procedure Step 1 Set the segment and end attributes of the ATM services on the NE A and NE B. 117 .

Select By Function and select Tributary Loopback from the drop-down menu. Procedure Step 1 Connect the BER tester to an E1 port on the local NE. Ltd. Equipment. Click Apply. Prerequisite l l l l The antennas have been aligned. Tools. see Maintenance Guide and rectify the fault based on the test result. perform an inloop at the E1 port by using the NMS.. The E1 service must be configured. 5. The weather is favorable. Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Select the PDH interface board in the Object Tree. 6. ----End 5. select Inloop. 2.5 Testing AM Switching By testing AM switching. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co.1 Testing AM Switching by Using a BER Tester If a BER tester is available.5. 1. The Confirm dialog box is displayed. 5. Test Result should be Test succeeded. In normal situations. 4. the BER tester can be used to test AM switching.OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Commissioning Guide (U2000) 5 System Commissioning 4. Set Loopback Point NE of the ATM service to be tested to NE B. In Tributary Loopback. Click OK. choose Configuration > PDH Interface. Step 2 On the remote NE. 6. If the test is not successful. The radio links must be the Integrated IP radio links for which the AM function is enabled. which are not discarded in the lowest-order modulation mode. 3. Click Test to start an LB test. 5. you can determine whether the AM switching is normal over radio links. and Materials l l U2000 BER tester Precautions The following test procedure uses the E1 services between NEs as an example. NOTE Test the E1 services with the highest priority. 118 . In the Function Tree.

Select the IF board from the NE Explorer. and then choose Configuration > IF Interface from the Function Tree. 1. 4. On the local NE. Click the IF Attributes tab. Click the IF Attributes tab. Transmit-End Modulation Mode should be Manually Modulation Mode of a pre-set value. 1. 8. Select the IF board from the NE Explorer. 7. On the local NE. and then choose Configuration > IF Interface from the Function Tree. Click Query. The test result should show that no bit error occurs. 3. 2. 3. 3. The Operation Result dialog box is displayed. and set Manually Modulation Mode to the same value as Modulation Mode of the Guarantee AM Capacity. Click Apply. Click Close. 3.OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Commissioning Guide (U2000) 5 System Commissioning The Confirm dialog box is displayed. 1. Click the IF Attributes tab. Select the IF board from the NE Explorer. 2. Step 3 Configure the Hybrid/AM attribute on the local NE. Click OK. 119 . and set Modulation Mode of the Guarantee AM Capacity and Modulation Mode of the Full AM Capacity to the planned values. 2. Step 7 Query the AM working status on the local NE. Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. Click Apply. Step 6 Configure the Hybrid/AM attribute to the planned values on the local NE. Transmit-End Modulation mode should be Modulation Mode of the Full AM Capacity of a preset value. set the AM attribute to Enable. Click the IF Attributes tab. Step 5 Use the BER tester to test the bit errors. 1. Step 4 Query the AM working status on the local NE. Select the IF board from the NE Explorer.. and then choose Configuration > IF Interface from the Function Tree. and then choose Configuration > IF Interface from the Function Tree. 4. Click Query. 2. set the AM attribute to Disable. Ltd.

2. and set Manually Modulation Mode to the same value as Modulation Mode of the Guarantee AM Capacity. and Materials U2000 Procedure Step 1 Configure the Hybrid/AM attribute on the local NE. The Confirm dialog box is displayed. The Confirm dialog box is displayed. Click OK. and then choose Configuration > IF Interface from the Function Tree. 4. 120 . 1. Select the PDH interface board in the Object Tree. select Non-Loopback. There should be no bit errors. Step 2 Query the 15-minute performance value of the IF board on the local NE. Equipment. The radio links must be the Integrated IP radio links for which the AM function is enabled. In Tributary Loopback.OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Commissioning Guide (U2000) NOTE 5 System Commissioning When adverse weather prevails. Click OK. Click Apply. The weather is favorable. 3. 7. Select the IF board from the NE Explorer. Tools. choose Configuration > PDH Interface. 6. ----End 5.2 Testing AM Switching Without a BER Tester If no BER tester is available. the current modulation mode may be lower than the value of Modulation Mode of the Full AM Capacity. The Operation Result dialog box is displayed. 8. Select By Function and select Tributary Loopback from the drop-down menu. On the local NE. Step 8 Check the BER test result.5. 1. 3. Click Close.. set the AM attribute to Disable. 4. Click Apply. Prerequisite l l l The antennas have been aligned. Click the IF Attributes tab. Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. 5. In the Function Tree. Step 9 Release the inloop set in Step 2. you can test AM switching by querying the bit errors over radio links. Ltd. 2.

select Display Zero Data and Display Continuous Severely Errored Seconds. Click Reset. If the value is not 0. 5. 4. Click Query. Select the IF board from the NE Explorer. Select the desired IF board from the Object Tree in NE Explorer. choose Performance > Current Performance. 121 . and then choose Configuration > IF Interface from the Function Tree. Step 7 Query the AM working status on the local NE. Click Apply. 4. 2. 2. Select the IF board from the NE Explorer. select All. 2. and set Modulation Mode of the Guarantee AM Capacity and Modulation Mode of the Full AM Capacity to the planned values. the value of FEC_UNCOR_BLOCK_CNT should be 0. 1. the value of FEC_UNCOR_BLOCK_CNT should be 0. On the local NE. Ltd. Set Monitor Period to 15-Minute. 1. 3. 5. 1. In performance events. choose Reset on the performance register to clear the existing performance values. 4. Step 4 Reset the performance event register. select FEC Performance. In the Function Tree. Step 6 Repeat Step 2. 2. 3. The confirmation dialog box is displayed. set the AM attribute to Enable. In the Function Tree. Step 3 Query the AM working status on the local NE. Step 5 Configure the Hybrid/AM attribute to the planned values on the local NE. Click the IF Attributes tab. Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. 3. In performance events. In Monitored Object Filter Criteria. 3. choose Performance > Current Performance. In Count. and then close the Operation Result dialog box is displayed. Click Close.. and then choose Configuration > IF Interface from the Function Tree. In Display Options. Wait for a period. Click Query. 6. Click the IF Attributes tab. Click Yes. Transmit-End Modulation Mode should be Manually Modulation Mode of a pre-set value.OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Commissioning Guide (U2000) 5 System Commissioning 1. and query the 15-minute performance value of the IF board on the local NE. Select the desired IF board from the Object Tree in NE Explorer.

----End 5. 5. Prerequisite l l l The antennas have been aligned. Transmit-End Modulation mode should be Modulation Mode of the Full AM Capacity of a preset value. Ltd. you can determine whether the protection switching is normal over radio links. Equipment. E1 services are configured. 2. Click Query.OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Commissioning Guide (U2000) 5 System Commissioning 1. The equipment is configured with IF 1+1 protection. Click the IF Attributes tab.1 Testing IF 1+1 Switching You can verify whether the IF 1+1 protection function is in the normal state by checking the working board of the IF 1+1 protection group before and after the switching. Tools.6.. 3.6 Testing Protection Switching By testing protection switching. 122 . the current modulation mode may be lower than the value of Modulation Mode of the Full AM Capacity. and then choose Configuration > IF Interface from the Function Tree. Select the IF board from the NE Explorer. NOTE When adverse weather prevails. and Materials l l U2000 BER tester Test Connection Diagram Figure 5-4 Configuration for testing IF 1+1 switching NE A and NE B are configured as follows: l l l l Main IF board: ISU2 in slot 3 Standby IF board: ISU2 in slot 5 Main ODU: ODU in slot 23 Standby ODU: ODU in slot 25 Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co.

. connect one E1 port to the BER tester. you can compare the values of Active Board of Device or Active Board of Channel in Protection Group before and after the protection switching. 6. Ltd.. Step 3 On NE B at the remote site. 5.OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Commissioning Guide (U2000) 5 System Commissioning NE A NE B As shown in Figure 5-4. In Tributary Loopback. Click OK. 3. NOTE l If Working Mode of the IF 1+1 protection is set to HSB. If. choose Configuration > PDH Interface. 4. 7. 123 . The switching occurs at NE A. The switching occurs at NE A. and Enable Reverse Switching should be set to Enable. Precautions NOTE If no BER tester is available on site. Click Apply. perform a software inloop at the E1 port by using the NMS. A BER tester is available on site No BER tester is available on site Then. Procedure Step 1 Check whether a BER tester is available at the central site. Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Select the PDH interface board in the Object Tree. 2. Click OK. Select By Function and select Tributary Loopback from the drop-down menu.. TX Status should be set to Mute for the ODU on the main channel of NE A. The Confirm dialog box is displayed. TX Status should be set to Mute for the ODU on the main channel of NE B. l If Working Mode of the IF 1+1 protection is set to SD. TX Status should be set to Mute for the ODU on the main channel of NE A. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. select Inloop. l If Working Mode of the IF 1+1 protection is set to FD.. and Enable Reverse Switching should be set to Enable. The Confirm dialog box is displayed. 1. The switching occurs at NE A. In the Function Tree. the following procedures use the E1 services between NE A and NE B that are configured with 1+1 HSB protection as an example. Perform Step 2 through Step 11. Perform Step 6 through Step 10. Step 2 On NE A at the central site..

3. It should show that the services are restored after transient interruption. Check the test result on the BER tester. 1. Refer to 5. the value of Active Board of Device should be the standby IF board 5-ISU2.. Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer of NE A. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co..2. 4. and the E1 services are transmitted on the radio link No BER tester is available on site. 8. The BER tester should show that no bit errors occur. Click Close. Select the corresponding protection group in Protection Group. 1. and choose Configuration > IF 1+1 Protection from the Function Tree. Ltd. query the status of the protection group that is configured on NE A. 1. Select the desired ODU.. and choose Configuration > IF 1+1 Protection from the Function Tree.OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Commissioning Guide (U2000) 5 System Commissioning The Operation Result dialog box is displayed. 2. 3. and click Query. Step 8 Check service availability after the switching. Click Apply. 3. Click Close. In Protection Group. and set TX Status to Mute. No BER tester is available on site. and choose Configuration > IF 1+1 Protection from the Function Tree. Select the desired NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer of NE A. 3. query the status of the protection group that is configured on NE A.. and the Ethernet services are transmitted on the radio link Step 9 After the switching. Step 5 Set Enable Reverse Switching in the 1+1 HSB protection group for NE A. 4. Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer of NE A. Click Apply.3 Testing Ethernet Services to test availability of the Ethernet services. and click Query. Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer of NE A. 1. the value of Active Board of Device should be the main IF board 3-ISU2. Step 4 Test the BER by using the BER tester. Step 6 Before the switching. and choose Configuration > Link Configuration from the Function Tree. and set Enable Reverse Switching to Enable. Refer to 5. In Protection Group. Click the IF/ODU Configuration tab. 124 Issue 01 (2011-10-30) . Step 7 Set TX Status to Mute for the main ODU 23-ODU of NE A. A BER tester is available on site Then. If.. 2. Select the corresponding protection group in Protection Group. 2.2 Testing E1 Services Using PRBS to test availability of the E1 services. Select the corresponding protection group in Protection Group. 2.

Click Close. 1. 1. The Confirm dialog box is displayed. In Tributary Loopback. Step 11 Release the software inloop set in Step 3. 6. 3. Click Apply. Select the corresponding protection group in Protection Group. 2. 7. Click Apply. Click the IF/ODU Configuration tab. Equipment. Select By Function and select Tributary Loopback from the drop-down menu. select Non-Loopback. ----End 5. Click Close. 8. and set Enable Reverse Switching to Disable. Step 12 Restore the setting of Enable Reverse Switching in Step 5. 4. choose Configuration > PDH Interface. The Confirm dialog box is displayed. Tools. 1. Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer of NE A. 2. Click Apply. 3. 125 . Prerequisite l l The antennas have been aligned. In the Function Tree. Select the PDH interface board in the Object Tree. Click OK. 4. 3. 5. Click OK. 4. The Operation Result dialog box is displayed. and choose Configuration > Link Configuration from the Function Tree. Select the desired NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer of NE A. and set TX Status to Unmute.OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Commissioning Guide (U2000) 5 System Commissioning Step 10 Set TX Status to Unmute for the main ODU 23-ODU of NE A. and Materials l l Issue 01 (2011-10-30) U2000 BER tester Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. The equipment must be configured with the N+1 protection. Ltd. Select the desired ODU. and choose Configuration > IF 1+1 Protection from the Function Tree.2 Testing N+1 Protection Switching You can verify whether the IF N+1 protection function works normally by checking the working board of the IF N+1 protection group before and after the switching.. 2.6.

Click OK. If. 1. Perform Step 5 to Step 9. 2. Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. Select the PDH interface board in the Object Tree. 5. 126 . you can compare the values of Switching Status in Slot Mapping Relation before and after the protection switching. connect one E1 port to the BER tester. Perform Step 2 to Step 10. Click Apply..OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Commissioning Guide (U2000) 5 System Commissioning Test Connection Diagram Figure 5-5 Configuration for testing N+1 protection switching NE A and NE B are configured as follows: l l l l Main IF boards: ISU2 in slot 3 and ISU2 in slot 5 Standby IF board: ISU2 in slot 4 Main ODUs: ODU in slot 23 and ODU in slot 25 Standby ODU: ODU in slot 24 NE A NE B As shown in Figure 5-5... Procedure Step 1 Check whether a BER tester is available at the central site. In Tributary Loopback. select Inloop. Ltd. the following procedures consider the E1 services between NE A and NE B that are configured with the N+1 (N=2) configuration as an example.. Select By Function and select Tributary Loopback from the drop-down menu. perform a software inloop at the E1 port by using the NMS. 4. choose Configuration > PDH Interface. In the Function Tree. 6. The Confirm dialog box is displayed. A BER tester is available on site No BER tester is available on site Then. Step 3 At the remote site NE B. 3. The Confirm dialog box is displayed.. Precautions NOTE If no BER tester is available on site. Step 2 At the central site NE A.

. See 5. Select the ID of the protection group to be queried. 8. query the status of the protection group that is configured on NE B. Step 6 Set TX Status to Mute for the main ODU 23-ODU of NE A.2 Testing E1 Services Using PRBS to test availability of the E1 services. In Slot Mapping Relation. Click the IF/ODU Configuration tab. Step 7 Check service availability after the switching. NOTE If a fault arises. Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer of NE B. Step 4 Test the BER by using the BER tester. Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co.. Step 8 After the switching. 1. Select the ID of the protection group to be queried.OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Commissioning Guide (U2000) 5 System Commissioning 7. The Operation Result dialog box is displayed. 2. 3. Switching Status of the working units 3-ISU2-1 and 5ISU2-1 and the protection unit 4-ISU2-1 should be Normal. 1. In Slot Mapping Relation. 4. See 5. Check the test result on the BER tester. the Switching Status of the working unit 3-ISU2-1 for the service that is configured with the N+1 protection should be SF. It should show that the services are restored after a transient interruption.. Select the desired ODU. Step 5 Before the switching. If. and the Ethernet services are transmitted on the radio link. Click Close. query the status of the protection group that is configured on NE B. and then choose Configuration > N+1 protection from the Function Tree. Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer of NE B. A BER tester is available on site Then. and then click Query. 3.. 1. 2.. Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer of NE A. and then choose Configuration > N+1 protection from the Function Tree. 3. and then click Query. No BER tester is available on site. No BER tester is available on site. The BER tester should show that no bit error occurs.2.3 Testing Ethernet Services to test availability of the Ethernet service. you must rectify the fault and then proceed with the N+1 protection testing. 2. 127 . and choose Configuration > Link Configuration from the Function Tree. and the E1 services are transmitted on the radio link. Click Apply. Click OK. and set TX Status to Mute. Ltd.

1. 6. 8. and choose Configuration > Link Configuration from the Function Tree. ----End 5. Click OK. Click Close. Figure 5-6 shows a network composed of radio links. Equipment. 3. and Materials l l U2000 BER tester Test Connection Diagram As shown in Figure 5-6. Prerequisite l l The antennas have been aligned. 4. Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer of NE A. The Operation Result dialog box is displayed. 1. 3. 128 . 2. 7. 4. Click the IF/ODU Configuration tab. and the test procedures are similar in the case of a network composed of optical fiber links.OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Commissioning Guide (U2000) 5 System Commissioning Step 9 Set TX Status to Unmute for the main ODU 23-ODU of NE A. Click OK. Select the PDH interface board in the Object Tree. In Tributary Loopback.6. 5. The equipment is configured with the SNCP. In the Function Tree. select Non-Loopback. choose Configuration > PDH Interface.3 Testing SNCP Switching You can verify whether SNCP works normally by checking the working port of the SNCP protection group before and after the switching. and set TX Status to Unmute. Click Apply. 2. Ltd. The Confirm dialog box is displayed. the following procedures consider the E1 services between NE A and NE C that are configured with SNCP as an example. Select the desired ODU. Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co.. Step 10 Release the loopback set in Step 3. Tools. The Confirm dialog box is displayed. Select By Function and select Tributary Loopback from the drop-down menu. Click Apply.

connect one E1 port to the BER tester.. 1. perform a software inloop at the E1 port by using the NMS. If. Perform Step 2 through Step 10. Step 2 At the central site NE A. Ltd. Procedure Step 1 Check whether a BER tester is available at the central site.. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. Perform Step 5 through Step 9...OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Commissioning Guide (U2000) 5 System Commissioning Figure 5-6 Configuration for testing SNCP switching NE A and NE C are configured as follows: l l l l West IF board: ISU2 in slot 3 East IF board: ISU2 in slot 4 West ODU: ODU in slot 23 East ODU: ODU in slot 24 NE A Protecting SNC Working SNC NE D NE B NE C Precautions NOTE If no BER tester is available on site. Step 3 At the remote site NE C. A BER tester is available on site No BER tester is available on site Then.. Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Select the PDH interface board in the Object Tree. 129 . you can compare the values of Active Channel in Working Service before an d after the protection switching.

then click Function. In Active Channel. Click Apply. select an SNCP service that is already created. Step 6 Set TX Status to Mute for the west ODU 23-ODU of NE A. and finally select Query Switching Status. 3. and set TX Status to Mute. The Operation Result dialog box is displayed. Select the desired ODU. In the Function Tree. 8. Select By Function and select Tributary Loopback from the drop-down menu. 2. Step 4 Test the BER by using the BER tester. Click OK.. and choose Configuration > SNCP Service Control from the Function Tree. . If... The Confirm dialog box is displayed. Step 7 Check service availability after the switching. 4. 6. A BER tester is available on site Then. Click OK. Normal should be displayed. Click the IF/ODU Configuration tab. 3. 5. It should show that the services are restored after a transient interruption. Check the test result on the BER tester. Working Channel should be displayed. 1.. 3. and choose Configuration > Link Configuration from the Function Tree. In Working Service. Click Close. The BER tester should show that no bit errors occur. 1. 130 Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. In Current Status.. The current SNCP status of the equipment is displayed in Working Service and Protection Service. Ltd. 7. Step 5 Before the switching. Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer of NE C. 4. Click Apply.OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Commissioning Guide (U2000) 5 System Commissioning 2. 2. select Inloop. query the status of the protection group that is configured on NE C. The Confirm dialog box is displayed. Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer of NE A. In Tributary Loopback. choose Configuration > PDH Interface.

3. Select the desired ODU. ----End Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. 2. 3. and choose Configuration > Link Configuration from the Function Tree. 8. In the Function Tree.. Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer of NE A. query the status of the protection group that is configured on NE C. Select the PDH interface board in the Object Tree. 2. In Active Channel. 131 . the service switching mode is displayed. and set TX Status to Unmute. 1. The Confirm dialog box is displayed. and then select Query Switching Status. 5. Ltd.. Click OK. Then.2 Testing E1 Services Using PRBS to test availability of the E1 services. Click Apply. Step 8 After the switching. The Operation Result dialog box is displayed. In Current Status.. Click the IF/ODU Configuration tab. Click Close. 3. and the E1 services are transmitted on the radio link. 1. The current SNCP status of the equipment is displayed in Working Service and Protection Service. 4. choose Configuration > PDH Interface. Step 10 Release the loopback set in Step 3. No BER tester is available on site. 4. Protection Channel should be displayed. 1. Click OK. Select By Function and select Tributary Loopback from the drop-down menu. 2.OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Commissioning Guide (U2000) 5 System Commissioning If. See 5.. 7. Click Apply. Step 9 Set TX Status to Unmute for the west ODU 23-ODU of NE A. select Non-Loopback. Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer of NE C. The Confirm dialog box is displayed. and choose Configuration > SNCP Service Control from the Function Tree. In Tributary Loopback. Click Function.. 6.2.

and Materials U2000 Test Connection Diagram As shown in Figure 5-7. Ltd. NE C. The RPL owner node is NE D.4 Testing ERPS Switching You can verify whether the ERPS function is in the normal state by checking the port status of the ERPS protection group before and after the switching. and NE D are configured as follows: l l l l West IF board: ISU2 in slot 3 East IF board: ISU2 in slot 5 West ODU: ODU in slot 23 East ODU: ODU in slot 25 East West NE B Protection channel West NE A East NE D East Working channel West NE C East West Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. Prerequisite l l The equipment is configured with ERPS. Figure 5-7 Configuration for testing ERPS NE A. Tools. Equipment. 132 . the following procedures use the Ethernet services that are configured with ERPS between NE A and NE D as an example.. NE B. The network cable for carrying the working and protection Ethernet services of ERPS is properly connected.OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Commissioning Guide (U2000) 5 System Commissioning 5.6.

4.. 1. Step 6 Set TX Status to Unmute for the west ODU 23-ODU of NE A. and set TX Status to Mute. query the status of the protection group that is configured on NE D. 1. Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer of NE A. and set TX Status to Unmute. The value of State Machine Status should be Protection. Click Apply. 3. 1.5 Testing MPLS APS Protection Switching By checking the change in the status of MPLS tunnels before and after the MPLS APS switching. Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer of NE A.3 Testing Ethernet Services to test availability of the Ethernet services. Click the IF/ODU Configuration tab. 3. and choose Configuration > Link Configuration from the Function Tree. 2. 2. Click the IF/ODU Configuration tab. and choose Configuration > Ethernet Protection > ERPS Management from the Function Tree. The LossRate in the Detection Result should be 0. and choose Configuration > Ethernet Protection > ERPS Management from the Function Tree. 2.3 Testing Ethernet Services to test availability of the Ethernet services.OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Commissioning Guide (U2000) 5 System Commissioning Procedure Step 1 Before the switching. Step 4 After the switching. Step 3 Set TX Status to Mute for the west ODU 23-ODU of NE A. Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer of NE D. query the status of the protection group that is configured on NE D. Select the ERPS protection group to be queried. Step 5 Refer to 5. Ltd. Select the desired ODU.6. and click Query. 1. Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. ----End 5. 133 . The LossRate in the Detection Result should be 0. 3. Select the ERPS protection group to be queried. Select the desired ODU. 3. 4. The value of State Machine Status should be Idle. Click Apply. Step 2 Refer to 5. and click Query. Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer of NE D. and choose Configuration > Link Configuration from the Function Tree. you can verify whether the MPLS APS protection function is normal. 2.

services are transmitted and received in a different tunnel respectively.OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Commissioning Guide (U2000) 5 System Commissioning Prerequisite l l The MPLS tunnel protection group must be created properly. In the NE Explorer. select NE A and then choose Configuration > APS Protection Management from the Function Tree. and Materials U2000 Background Information 1:1 protection In normal situations. the equipment at the transmit end transmits services through the protection tunnel. That is. Therefore. and then choose Query Switching Status from the shortcut menu. to check the MPLS protection group configured on the NE. service switching is realized. Click the Tunnel APS Management tab. 2. Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. Test Connection Diagram Figure 5-8 shows the connection diagram for testing MPLS APS protection switching. right-click the tested protection group. and the equipment at the receive end receive services through the protection tunnel after a negotiation through the APS protocol.. Ltd. Figure 5-8 Connection diagram for testing the MPLS APS protection Working Tunnel NE A NE B Protection Tunnel Procedure Step 1 Query the switching status of the current MPLS tunnel 1:1 protection group on NE A and NE B. 1. You must be an NM user with NE operator authority or higher. NE A and NE B are the OptiX RTN 950 NEs. services are transmitted in the working tunnel. Tools. 134 . Equipment. When the working tunnel is faulty.

Choose the protection group for switching. Click the Tunnel APS Management tab and choose the protection group for switching. the switching status should be Normal. 3. the operation is performed no matter whether the current status of the protection tunnel is normal. Step 3 Query the switching status of the MPLS 1:1 protection groups on NE A and NE B after the switching. and then choose Forced Switching from the shortcut menu. l Manual switching: The operation is performed only when the status of the protection tunnel is normal. Right-click the tested protection group. Ltd.OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Commissioning Guide (U2000) 5 System Commissioning 3. In normal situations. In the NE Explorer. Click Close. select NE A and then choose Configuration > APS Protection Management from the Function Tree. The Operation Result dialog box is displayed. 135 . 5.. NOTE l Forced switching: With the highest priority. and check its switching status. 4. Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. Step 2 Switch the services to the protection tunnel manually and forcedly. The Confirm dialog box is displayed. 1. 2. Click OK.

the state of the protection group should be Forced Switching. In normal situation. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. The Operation Result dialog box is displayed.6. 5. 136 . Services is restored to the working tunnel. 6. the state of the protection group should be Manual (Working to Protection) Switching. the switching status should be Forced Switching. Query Active Tunnel of the tunnel protection group. 3. In the NE Explorer. Step 4 Restore the services on NE A and NE B to the working tunnel. ----End 5. Click Close. select NE A and then choose Configuration > APS Protection Management from the Function Tree. Working should be Standby. In the NE Explorer. 1. 4.6 Testing Linear MSP Switching You can verify whether the linear MSP group works normally by checking the working port of the linear MSP group before and after the switching. 2. to check Switching Status of the tunnel protection group. l If Manual Switching to Protection is performed at the previous step. Click the Tunnel APS Management tab and choose the protection group for switching. 3. Prerequisite l Issue 01 (2011-10-30) The equipment must be configured with linear MSP.OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Commissioning Guide (U2000) 5 System Commissioning 1. select NE A and then choose Configuration > APS Protection Management from the Function Tree. 4. Right-click the tested protection group and then choose Clear from the shortcut menu. Ltd. In normal situations. and Protection should be Active. Click OK. Click the Tunnel APS Management tab and choose the protection group for switching. The Confirm dialog box is displayed. NOTE l If Forced Switching is performed at the previous step. Right-click the tested protection group and then choose Query Switching Status from the shortcut menu. 2.. Click Query.

Step 3 At the remote site NE B. Perform Step 2 to Step 10. Ltd. select Inloop.OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Commissioning Guide (U2000) 5 System Commissioning l The working and protection optical fibers of the linear MSP are connected properly. Procedure Step 1 Check whether a BER tester is available at the central site. Figure 5-9 Configuration for testing linear MSP switching NE A Working channel NE B Protection channel Precautions NOTE If no BER tester is available on site. perform a software inloop at the corresponding E1 port by using the NMS. Click Apply. Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. you can compare the values of West Switching Status in Slot Mapping Relation before and after the protection switching. Select By Function and select Tributary Loopback from the drop-down menu. The Confirm dialog box is displayed. and Materials l l U2000 BER tester Test Connection Diagram Figure 5-9 shows linear MSP composed of the OptiX RTN equipment through the connection of optical fibers. If. 3.. 1. Step 2 At the central site NE A. 4. choose Configuration > PDH Interface.. 137 .. In Tributary Loopback. connect one E1 port to the BER tester. A BER tester is available on site No BER tester is available on site Then. 2.. 5. Equipment. Perform Step 5 to Step 9. In the Function Tree. The following procedures consider the E1 services from NE A to NE B as an example. Select the PDH interface board in the Object Tree. Tools..

Check the test result on the BER tester. Select By Function and then select Laser Switch from the drop-down list. 4. 3. the values of West Switching Status should be Idle. In Slot Mapping Relation. Click OK. you must rectify the fault and proceed with the linear MSP switching testing. and then choose Configuration > Linear MS from the Function Tree. . 7.. Step 6 Shut down the laser for the working unit on NE A.. Step 7 Check service availability after the switching. Step 4 Test the BER by using the BER tester. The Operation Result dialog box is displayed. the value of West Switching Status should be Idle. 2. and then set Laser Switch to Close. Select the laser port that corresponds to the working unit. query the status of the protection group that is configured on NE A. 1. Click OK. 8. Ltd. Click OK. The Operation Result dialog box is displayed. Click Query. The Confirm dialog box is displayed. The BER tester is available on site Then. 7. and then select Query Switching Status. In Slot Mapping Relation. If. Click Apply.. Click Close. 6. 2. If a fault arises. Click OK. 8.. 138 Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. The Confirm dialog box is displayed. It should show that the services are restored after a transient interruption. The BER tester should show that no bit errors occur. NOTE In the case of the working and protection units of the services that are configured with the linear MSP. Choose Configuration > SDH Interface from the Function Tree. 5. see the Maintenance Guide for handling the bit errors. The Confirm dialog box is displayed. If bit errors occur..OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Commissioning Guide (U2000) 5 System Commissioning 6. Step 5 Before the switching. 3. Select the required optical interface board from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer of NE A. 1. Click Close. select Working Unit. Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer of NE A.

Step 8 After the switching. Then. No BER tester is available on site. In Tributary Loopback. 2. If Revertive Mode is set to Revertive for the linear MSP. Step 9 Turn on the laser for the working unit on NE A. Select the laser port that corresponds to the working unit. Choose Configuration > SDH Interface from the Function Tree. 4. 1. NOTE In the case of the 1+1 linear MSP. If Revertive Mode is set to Non-Revertive for the linear MSP. 139 . 8. 3. l After the automatic switching occurs on the equipment. 2. The Operation Result dialog box is displayed. Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer of NE A. The Confirm dialog box is displayed.. l After the automatic switching occurs on the equipment. Click Apply. stop and then start the MSP protocol to restore the value of West Switching Status to Idle. Select By Function and select Tributary Loopback from the drop-down menu. 6. 2. In Slot Mapping Relation. Click Query. 3. choose Configuration > PDH Interface. 1. Click OK. Step 10 Release the loopback set in Step 3.OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Commissioning Guide (U2000) 5 System Commissioning If. select Working Unit. See 5. the services are restored. The Confirm dialog box is displayed. select Non-Loopback.. Click OK. and then set Laser Switch to Open. 5. Select By Function and then select Laser Switch from the drop-down list. 1. Revertive Mode is always set to Revertive. In Slot Mapping Relation. Revertive Mode can be set to Revertive or Non-Revertive. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co.2. Ltd.. and then choose Configuration > Linear MS from the Function Tree. and the E1 services are transmitted on the optical fiber link. 7. and then select Query Switching Status. query the status of the protection group that is configured on NE A.. Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Select the PDH interface board in the Object Tree.2 Testing E1 Services Using PRBS to test availability of the E1 services. Select the required optical interface board from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer of NE A. 3. the value of West Switching Status should be Switch upon signal failure. the change in values of West Switching Status and Protected Unit can be queried after the WTR time expires. the services are restored. In the case of the 1:N linear MSP.. 4. In the Function Tree. Click Close.

The Operation Result dialog box is displayed.. Click OK. Click OK. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. The antennas must be aligned. Click Apply. and Materials U2000 Procedure Step 1 Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. ----End 5. l If a service clock or an external clock is selected as the working clock of the radio network.8 Testing the FM over a Radio Link The fade margin (FM) over a radio link can be evaluated by measuring the mean square errors (MSEs) at different received signal levels (RSLs). Step 2 Click Query. 7. The Confirm dialog box is displayed. the clocks of all the NEs should be in locked mode.7 Checking the Clock Status Check the clock status for each NE to ensure that the clocks of all the NEs on a radio network are synchronized. Prerequisite l l The weather is favorable. and choose Configuration > Clock > Physical Clock > Clock Synchronization Status from the Function Tree. The Confirm dialog box is displayed. 140 Issue 01 (2011-10-30) . Equipment. Click Close. The link that transmits clocks is in the normal state. 8.OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Commissioning Guide (U2000) 5 System Commissioning 5. and the RSLs at both ends of the radio link and the crosspolarization discrimination (XPD) must meet the requirements. this clock should be in freerun mode and the clocks of the other NEs should be in locked mode. Ltd. ----End 5. 6. Step 3 Repeat Step 1 through Step 2 to check the working modes of the other NEs on the radio network. Prerequisite The clock configuration is complete. Tools. NOTE l If the clock of an NE is selected as the working clock of the radio network.

the paths in polarization direction V and polarization direction H are tested synchronously. that is. Select the corresponding IF board from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Select the services. 5. 2. Equipment. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. 1. 2. Click the ATPC Attributes tab. In Slot Mapping Relation. 3. Step 3 Optional: If any E1 services between the two sites are E1 Priority enabled.OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Commissioning Guide (U2000) 5 System Commissioning Background Information The principle of the FM test is as follows: l l l Test the corresponding relations between RSLs and MSEs at multiple sites. the receiver sensitivity of the site. 2. Procedure Step 1 Optional: Lock the protection channel if the radio link between two sites is under 1+1 protection. For a radio link with 1+1 protection. 1. Tools. 3. and choose Configuration > IF 1 +1 Protection from the Function Tree. right-click the selected unit. For an XPIC radio link. The FM test can be supported by the IFU2 board and IFX2 board. The current RSL minus the receiver sensitivity is the FM. and Materials U2000 Precautions 1. Click OK again to close the dialog box. and choose Configuration > SDH Service Configuration from the Function Tree. all the services carried on the radio link maybe interrupted. Therefore. click OK. Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Select an NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. 4. 4. delete these E1 services. 2. 4. Therefore. 1.. Choose Protection Lockout from the shortcut menu. The main and standby radio paths are tested synchronously. Calculate the RSL corresponding to the demodulation threshold of the MSE. Click Apply. 3. 141 . Select an NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. When the FM is tested. it is recommended that you lock the protection path before testing the main radio link and that you switch the signal to the standby path forcedly before you test the standby radio link. the FMs of the working and protection boards are reported at the same time. In the displayed dialog box. the FMs of the working and protection boards are reported at the same time. Set ATPC Enable Status to Disabled. and choose Configuration > IF Interface. and right-click Delete. Then. select the working unit or protection unit. Ltd. Step 2 Disable the ATPC function on the radio link between two sites.

The Result dialog box displays that the test is successful. Set Manual Modulation Mode to the highest-efficiency modulation scheme. Step 4 Disable the E1 priority function and AM function on the radio link between two sites. Click Apply. Step 7 Select the IF board corresponding to the radio link that needs to be tested. 6. Click Apply.. Ltd. 2. and set AM Status to Disabled. Select the corresponding IF board. Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. and choose Configuration > Link Configuration. and set Enable E1 Priority to Disable. 3. select Remote To Local. and choose Configuration > Fade Margin. Click the IF/ODU Configuration tab. Step 5 Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. The Result dialog box displays the query result. Step 8 In Direction. Step 6 Click the Fade Margin tab. 4. 7. Step 9 Click Start. 3. Select the required IF board. Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. 1. 142 . 5.OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Commissioning Guide (U2000) 5 System Commissioning A confirmation dialog box is displayed to prompt you whether to delete the selected services. Click OK.

1. Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Step 11 Restore the ATPC function on the radio link between two sites. The Result dialog box displays that the test is successful. 143 . Choose Configuration > IF Interface. Set ATPC Enable Status to Enabled. 1. In Direction. Click the ATPC Attributes tab.. Select the corresponding IF board from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Step 12 Restore the AM function and E1 priority on the radio link between two sites. 4. Click the IF/ODU Configuration tab. 3. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. Ltd. and choose Configuration > Link Configuration.OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Commissioning Guide (U2000) 5 System Commissioning Step 10 Repeat Step 8 and Step 9. 2. Click Apply. 2. select Local To Remote.

and set AM Status to Enabled. Click OK to close the displayed dialog box. The Create SDH Service dialog box is displayed. 144 . 4.OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Commissioning Guide (U2000) 5 System Commissioning 3. 6. and click OK.. you can ensure that the test path cover all the radio links. 2. right-click the selected unit. Through this method. 4. Select an NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Step 14 Optional: Cancel the protection lockout for the 1+1 protection on the radio link. Choose Clear from the shortcut menu. and Materials l l l U2000 BER tester E1 jumper Precautions l If 24-hour BER cannot be tested for each hop of link because of restrictions of the actual situation.9 Testing 24-Hour BER You can check whether the equipment can transmit services stably for a long term by testing 24-hour BER. and choose Configuration > SDH Service Configuration from the Function Tree. The following test procedure uses the E1 services between NEs as an example. Set Enable E1 priority to Enabled. Click Apply. Tools. Step 13 Optional: Reconfigure the E1 services that were deleted in Step 3. Set Modulation Mode of the Guarantee AM Capacity and Modulation Mode of the Full AM Capacity to initial values. In Slot Mapping Relation. and Full E1 Capacity to the initial value. Equipment. Then. ----End 5. Click New. 1. Select an NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. 3. l Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. Ltd. 3. Reconfigure all deleted E1 services. 5. 1. perform the test for the E1 services at the first node and the last node. The E1 service must be configured. and choose Configuration > Link Configuration from the Function Tree. Prerequisite l l The antennas must be aligned. 2. Select the corresponding IF board. select the working unit or protection unit.

The Automatic Disabling of NE Function window lists the 3. 1. Do not test the services in a serial manner. Procedure Step 1 At the central site. 1. . Click Apply. test the E1 services one by one if the number of timeslots of the services is different from each other. click selected NEs.. The Confirm dialog box is displayed. For SDH Optical/Electrical Interface Loopback. l To test CES services in CESoPSN mode. select Inloop. Click Close. Click Apply. 4. Click OK. Step 3 Perform the 24-hour BER test by using the BER tester. 3. In the Function Tree. set Auto Disabling to Disabled. Choose Configuration > NE Batch Configuration > Automatic Disabling of NE Function from the Main Menu. l To test CES E1 services. 2. The Automatic Disabling of NE Function window is displayed. Ltd. Select By Function and select Tributary Loopback from the drop-down menu. 5. In Tributary Loopback. 4. The Confirm dialog box is displayed. l To test CES services in CESoPSN mode. The Operation Result dialog box is displayed. DDF RX TX RX TX . 1 2 3 4 BER tester Step 2 On the equipment at the remote site. Select the PDH interface board in the Object Tree. disable the automatic loopback release function on the PDH interface board. perform a software inloop at the E1 port by using the NMS.OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Commissioning Guide (U2000) NOTE 5 System Commissioning l It is recommended that you test low-priority Ethernet services in good weather conditions. where the AM function works in the highest-efficiency modulation mode. 7. Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. 2. 8. 6. After that. . . Click OK. Select the required NEs in the Object Tree on the left side of the Automatic Disabling of NE Function window. extract several typical E1 services on the equipment and then connect them to the DDF in a serial manner. . choose Configuration > PDH Interface. 145 . Then. l The tested E1 services can be Native E1 services or CES E1 services. input these services into the BER tester. a BER tester supporting Nx64 kbit/s timeslot setting is necessary.

1. 8.. Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. Step 5 Release the loopback and serial connection. Click Apply. 2. 6. 146 . Select the PDH interface board in the Object Tree. Select By Function and select Tributary Loopback from the drop-down menu. 5. choose Configuration > PDH Interface. ----End Follow-up Procedure l l If the first 24-hour BER test does not meet the specified requirement. The Confirm dialog box is displayed. locate the fault by using the dichotomizing search or other methods until each channel passes the 24-hour BER test independently. Click Close. In Tributary Loopback.OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Commissioning Guide (U2000) 5 System Commissioning Step 4 Record the test result. 3. If the BER exceeds the nominal value in the test for a serial connection. In the Function Tree. Perform another 24-hour BER test until the test is passed. Click OK. select Non-Loopback. The Operation Result dialog box is displayed. 4. Ltd. find out the cause and rectify the fault. 7. which should meet the design requirements. The Confirm dialog box is displayed. Click OK.

147 . Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. Ltd. Huawei has developed the handheld tool dedicated to the site commissioning of the OptiX RTN equipment.1 Functions and Features The handheld tool provides various functions and features to meet the requirements of site commissioning of microwave equipment.OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Commissioning Guide (U2000) 6 Introduction to the Handheld Tool 6 Introduction to the Handheld Tool About This Chapter To improve commissioning efficiency..2 Operation Interface The handheld tool provides a user-friendly interface. 6. 6.

Supports settings and query of NE attributes. Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. but are different in exterior and key arrangement. and subnet mask. transmit power. T/R spacing. IP address. The two types are the same in function. 6. Supports query of all current alarms on the NE. Supports automatic backup to the flash memory for data protection after the NE databases are updated. modulation mode.. Supports query of the NE version and terminal version. The following figure shows the exterior and key arrangement of the two types of handheld tool. Displays all in-service physical board information in the standby window. extended ID.OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Commissioning Guide (U2000) 6 Introduction to the Handheld Tool 6. Supports settings and query of IF information. and supports serial port login mode from MML to NMS. extended ECC. power range. Ltd. Supports query of the basic information. NE ID. including NE name. The handheld tool is available in two types: type I and type IV. Automatically changes the LCT access enabling status to Enable. and 1+1 protection scheme. Supports regular query of the receive power of an ODU. Supports a real-time check on the physical connections between the handheld tool and the NE when the user interface is in standby state. 148 . The handheld tool provides the following functions: l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l Supports switch-on by pressing and holding the power button. settings of NE attributes through function key F2.2 Operation Interface The handheld tool provides a user-friendly interface. Supports automatic re-login in the case of disconnection. including transmit frequency. frequency range. and serial number of an ODU. Supports automatic login to the NE upon switch-on. Automatically adds logical boards for in-position physical boards. Supports settings of IF information through the F1 key. and query of configurations through function key F3. IF channel bandwidth. Supports settings and query of the DCN of an NE.1 Functions and Features The handheld tool provides various functions and features to meet the requirements of site commissioning of microwave equipment.

. Figure 6-2 Exterior and key arrangement of type IV handheld tool Screen Up and down keys Reset port Digit keys Backspace Charge indicator 1 4 7 C 2 5 8 0 3 6 9 F1 F2 F3 Communication port Function keys Power key Front Back Type I and type IV are almost the same. Ltd. function keys.OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Commissioning Guide (U2000) 6 Introduction to the Handheld Tool Figure 6-1 Exterior and key arrangement of type I handheld tool Screen Charge indicator Communication indicator Power key Digit keys Decimal points Up and down keys Backspace Function keys Communication port Back Reset port cover lock Battery area The keys include digit keys. 149 . power key. and confirmation key. Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. The window mainly displays configuration information about the NE and modification. The main difference is with regard to the key arrangement.

2 Board Configurations Before performing the networking planning.. 7. 7.1 Networking Diagram This topic describes the networking information about the NEs. 7. 7. you need to be familiar with the board configurations of each NE. Ltd.3 Service Planning The service planning information contains all the parameter information required for configuring the NE data. Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. 150 .OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Commissioning Guide (U2000) 7 Configuration Example of Service Data 7 Configuration Example of Service Data About This Chapter This topic uses an example of configuring service data of one hop of TDM radio equipment to describe how to configure service data.4 Configuration Process This topic describes the procedure of data configuration.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. as shown in Figure 7-2.. you need to configure 1+1 HSB for the radio link between NE A and NE B. Figure 7-1 Networking diagram 101 14930M 14510M 8E1,7M,16QAM 1+1 HSB H-polarzation Tx high Tx low NE A Link ID Tx high station Tx Freq. Figure 7-2 Board configuration diagram SLOT 10 (PIU) SLOT 11 SLOT (FAN) 9 (PIU) CST IF1 IF1 SLOT 7 SLOT 5 SLOT 3 SLOT 1 SP3D CST SLOT 7 SLOT 6 SLOT 4 SLOT 2 NOTE The ODU that is connected to the IF board in slot n occupies logical slot 20+n. The logical slot of the ODU is not shown in the board layout diagram. Radio work mode RF configuarion Polarization NE B 7. you need to be familiar with the board configurations of each NE. Tx low station Tx Freq. As shown in Figure 7-1. there is a TDM radio link between NE A and NE B that are constructed by the OptiX RTN 950.2 Board Configurations Before performing the networking planning. The board configurations of NE A are the same as the board configurations of NE B. Ltd.OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Commissioning Guide (U2000) 7 Configuration Example of Service Data 7. 151 .1 Networking Diagram This topic describes the networking information about the NEs.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. 16QAM 1+1 HSB H (horizontal polarization) 5 (NE A) 5 (NE B) Receive power (dBm) -42 (NE A) -42 (NE B) ATPC enabling Disabled NOTE a: This example does not provide the planning information (except for the polarization direction) that is not related to the IDU configuration.102 Radio Link Information Table 7-1 Planning information about radio links Parameter Tx high site Tx low site Tx frequency at the Tx high site (MHz) Tx frequency at the Tx low site (MHz) T/R Spacing (MHz) Microwave working mode Link protection mode Polarization directiona Transmit power (dBm) Link 1 NE A NE B 14930 14510 420 4) 8E1.101 NE B OptiX RTN 950 102 9 (default value) 129.0.OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Commissioning Guide (U2000) 7 Configuration Example of Service Data 7..3 Service Planning The service planning information contains all the parameter information required for configuring the NE data. Ltd.9.0.9. 7MHz. NE attributes Parameter Equipment type NE ID extended ID NE IP address NE A OptiX RTN 950 101 9 (default value) 129. 152 .

.OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Commissioning Guide (U2000) 7 Configuration Example of Service Data Information About IF Boards Based on the radio type. you can obtain the information of IF boards as shown in Table 7-2. Table 7-2 Information about IF boards Parameter Main IF board Standby IF board RF configuration mode Revertive mode Wait to Restore Time Enable Reverse Switching Link 1 3-IF1 5-IF1 1+1 HSB Revertive (default value) 600 seconds (default value) Disabled Timeslot Allocation Information Figure 7-3 Timeslot allocation diagram Links-1: NE A-NE B Station NE A Timeslot VC4-1 VC12: 1-8 2-SP3D:1-8 Add/Drop Foward 3-IF1 3-IF1 VC12: 1-8 2-SP3D:1-8 NE B Figure 7-3shows the service timeslots between NEs. . Ltd. E1 services between NE A and NE B: Ports 1-8 on the SP3D board in slot 2 add/drop services. and configuration rules of the 1+1 protection. slot priorities of IF boards. Clock and Orderwire Information Table 7-3 Clock and orderwire information Parameter Clock source First clock source Second clock source Third clock source Issue 01 (2011-10-30) NE A Internal clock source - NE B 3-IF1-1 5-IF1-1 Internal clock source 153 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co.

.4 Configuration Process This topic describes the procedure of data configuration. the network segment 129. Step 2 See Changing the ID of an NE and change NE IDs.9. Ltd. . The parameters of NE A and NE B are set as follows. The parameters are set as follows. start site commissioning from Step 5.9. modifying the parameters of NE communication. Precautions If operations including changing the ID of an NE.255. the following assumptions are made: the IP address of the gateway NE is never changed and the specific IP address is unknown. Therefore. and configuring logical boards are already performed. it is recommended that you set the IP address of the gateway NE as the search domain. In normal cases.OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Commissioning Guide (U2000) 7 Configuration Example of Service Data Parameter Orderw ire Orderwire phone number Call waiting time Orderwire port NE A 101 5 seconds 3-IF1-1 5-IF1-1 NE B 102 5 seconds 3-IF1-1 5-IF1-1 E1 Occupied overhead type E1 7.255 is used as the search domain to search for NEs. If the IP address of the gateway NE is known.255. NE A and NE B are created in NE List.255 NOTE In this example. Parameter Network Segment Value 129. Procedure Step 1 See Creating NEs by Using the Search Method and create the NEs. Parameter Value NE A ID Issue 01 (2011-10-30) NE B 102 154 101 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co.

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Commissioning Guide (U2000) 7 Configuration Example of Service Data Parameter Value NE A NE B 9 (default value) Extended ID 9 (default value) Step 3 See Configuring Logical Boards and configure logical boards. Configure logical boards based on their mapping relationships with the physical boards. Parameter Value (NE A) 3-IF1 & 23-ODU Work Mode Link ID TX Frequency(MHz) T/R Spacing(MHz) TX Power(dBm) TX Status Receive Power (dBm) ATPC Enable Status 4) 8E1. Step 5 See Creating IF 1+1 Protection and create IF 1+1 protection. The parameters of NE A and NE B are set as follows. Parameter Value NE A Working Mode Revertive Mode WTR Time(s) Enable Reverse Switching Working Board Protection Boar HSB Revertive Mode 600 Disabled 3-IF1A-1 5-IF1-1 NE B HSB Revertive Mode 600 Disabled 3-IF1A-1 5-IF1-1 Step 6 See Configuring IF/ODU Information for a Radio Link and configure the IF/ODU information.16QAM 101 14930 420 5 Unmute -42 Disabled Value (NE B) 3-IF1 & 23-ODU 4) 8E1..16QAM 101 14510 420 5 Unmute -42 Disabled Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co.7MHz. The parameters of NE A and NE B are set as follows. Ltd. Step 4 See Synchronizing NE Time and synchronize the NE time. 155 .7MHz.

The parameters of NE A and NE B are set as follows. The parameters of NE A and NE B are set as follows.3-6) Sink Sink VC4 Sink Timeslot Range(e.g. 1. The parameters of NE A and NE B are set as follows..OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Commissioning Guide (U2000) 7 Configuration Example of Service Data Step 7 See Creating Cross-Connections for Point-to-Point Services and create the crossconnections. NE B 9 102 3-IF1-1 5-IF1-1 156 . 1.g. Parameter Value NE A Level Direction Source Source VC4 Source Timeslot Range(e. Parameter Value NE A Clock Source Internal Clock Source NE B 3-IF1-1 5-IF1-1 Internal Clock Source Step 9 See Configuring the Orderwire Phone and configure the orderwire phone. Parameter Value NE A Call Waiting Time(s) Phone 1 Orderwire Port 9 101 3-IF1-1 5-IF1-1 Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co.3-6) VC-12 Bidirectional 3-IF1-1 VC4-1 1-8 2-SP3D 1-8 NE B VC-12 Bidirectional 3-IF1-1 VC4-1 1-8 2-SP3D 1-8 Step 8 See Configuring a Clock Source and configure clock sources. Ltd.

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Commissioning Guide (U2000) 7 Configuration Example of Service Data Parameter Value NE A NE B E1 Occupied Overhead Byte E1 ----End Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. 157 .. Ltd.

10 Parameter: Link Configuration_IF/ODU Configuration This topic describes the parameters that are used for configuring the IF/ODU.6 Parameter Description: Link Configuration_XPIC Workgroup_Creation This topic describes the parameters that are related to the XPIC function. A. 158 . A. A.2 Parameter Description: Login to an NE This topic describes the parameters that are used for logging into an NE. A. A.4 Parameter Description: Attribute_Changing NE IDs This topic describes the parameters that are used for changing NE IDs.7 Parameter Description: Link Configuration_XPIC This topic describes the parameters that are related to the XPIC function. A.11 Parameter Description: IF Interface_ATPC Attribute This topic describes the parameters that are related to the ATPC attributes.14 Parameter Description: Clock Source Priority Table Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co.3 Parameter Description: NE Attribute_NE ID Change This topic describes the parameters that are used for changing NE IDs.OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Commissioning Guide (U2000) A Parameters Description A Parameters Description This chapter describes the parameters used in this document. A. A.9 Parameter Description: IF 1+1 Protection_Create This topic describes the parameters that are used for creating an IF 1+1 protection group.8 Parameter Description: Link Configuration_IF 1+1 Protection This topic describes the parameters that are related to IF 1+1 protection. A. Ltd.1 Parameter Description: NE Searching This topic describes the parameters that are used for searching for NEs. A. A.5 Parameter Description: NE Communication Parameter Setting This topic describes the parameters that are used for NE communication setting. A.13 Parameter Description: SDH Service Configuration_Creation This parameter describes the parameters that are used for creating point-to-point crossconnections..12 Parameter Description: NE Time Synchronization This topic describes the parameters that are used for synchronizing the time of NEs. A. A.

A. Ltd. A.OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Commissioning Guide (U2000) A Parameters Description This topic describes the parameters that are related to the priority table of a clock source.16 Parameter Description: Orderwire_Advanced This topic describes the parameters that are used for advanced orderwire features. Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. 159 ..15 Parameter Description: Orderwire_General This topic describes the parameters that are used for general orderwire features.

Navigation Path Choose File > Discovery > NE from the Main Menu. NOTE If Address Type is set to IP Address of GNE or IP Address Range of GNE. 160 . Ltd. select IP Address of GNE. Parameters for the Search Field Parameter Address Type Value Range IP Address of GNE NSAP Address IP Address Range of GNE Default Value IP Address Range of GNE Description l If the OSI protocol is used on the DCN. ensure that the U2000 and relevant routers are configured with the IP routes for the network segment in which the U2000 and gateway NE are located. l If the IP protocol is used on the DCN.1 Parameter Description: NE Searching This topic describes the parameters that are used for searching for NEs. and if the U2000 (server) and the gateway NE are located in different network segments.. you can search for an NE based on IP Address of GNE or IP Address Range of GNE. ensure that the OSI protocol stack is installed. l To search for all the NEs that communicate with the gateway NE.OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Commissioning Guide (U2000) A Parameters Description A. l To select the gateway NE only. If Address Type is set to NSAP Address. you can search for an NE based on NSAP Address only. select IP Address Range of GNE. Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co.

such as 129. User Name - - This parameter specifies the user name of the gateway NE.. enter the number of the IP network segment in which the gateway NE is located. enter the IP address of the gateway NE. enter the NSAP address of the gateway NE. Password - - Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. such as 129. Ltd.9.255. l If Address Type is set to IP Address Range of GNE. l If Address Type is set to NSAP Address.9.OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Commissioning Guide (U2000) A Parameters Description Parameter Search Address Value Range - Default Value - Description l If Address Type is set to IP Address of GNE. This parameter specifies the password of the gateway NE.x. 161 .x.255.

l This parameter is valid only when Create NE after search is selected. it is recommended that you select Create NE after search. Search for NE is selected automatically. Ltd.OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Commissioning Guide (U2000) A Parameters Description Parameter for Searching for NEs Parameter Create NE after search Value Range Selected Deselected Default Value Deselected Description l To create NEs in batches. NE User - - l This parameter specifies the user name to be entered when an NE is created.. The NEs are automatically created after they are found. Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. Password - - l This parameter specifies the password to be entered when an NE is created. l After Create NE after search is selected. NOTE If only Create NE after search is selected. enter NE User and Password that are used for creating an NE. l This parameter is valid only when Create NE after search is selected. 162 .

163 .OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Commissioning Guide (U2000) A Parameters Description Parameter Upload after create Value Range Selected Deselected Default Value Deselected Description l This parameter specifies whether to automatically upload the NE data after the NE is found and created. l This parameter is valid only when Create NE after search is selected. GNE Address - - GNE ID - - Created As GNE Yes No Yes Port - 1400 Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. which consists of extended ID and NE ID. Parameter for the Found NEs Parameter NE ID Value Range Default Value Description This parameter indicates the ID of the found NE. Ltd. Connection Mode Common Security SSL Common The communication between the client and the server is encrypted if this parameter is set to Security SSL. This parameter indicates the ID of the gateway NE that is connected to the found NE. This parameter specifies the communication port. l If only Upload after create is selected. This parameter indicates the address of the gateway NE that is connected to the found NE.. l This parameter specifies the password to be entered when an NE is created. Search for NE and Create NE after search are selected automatically.

Related Tasks 5.2 Parameter Description: Login to an NE This topic describes the parameters that are used for logging into an NE. Ltd. 164 .1. Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. The default password of user lct is password.3 Logging In to an NE A. Parameters Parameter User Name Value Range Default Value lct Description This parameter specifies the name of the user.1 Creating NEs by Using the Search Method A. This parameter can take the default value in the case of initial login. select the target NE and click NE Login.. enter User Name and Password that were used for the latest login to log in to the NE.2. When this parameter is selected. Password Use the same user name and password to login Use the user name and password that was used last time Selected Deselected Selected Deselected Deselected Deselected Related Tasks 4. enter User Name and Password to log in to all the selected NEs.OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Commissioning Guide (U2000) A Parameters Description Parameter NE Status Value Range Created Uncreated Default Value - Description This parameter indicates whether the found NE is created.3 Parameter Description: NE Attribute_NE ID Change This topic describes the parameters that are used for changing NE IDs. When this parameter is selected. Navigation Path In the NE List.

Parameters for Changing NE IDs Parameter New ID Value Range Default Value Description l The new ID refers to the basic ID. New Extended ID 1 to 254 9 If the number of existing NEs does not exceed the range represented by the basic ID.OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Commissioning Guide (U2000) A Parameters Description Navigation Path 1. In the Main Topology. Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. 2. Navigation Path 1. do not change the extended ID. 165 . Related Tasks 4. NOTE The NE ID consisting of the basic ID and extended ID identifies an NE on the NMS.2. 3. l This parameter is set according to the network plan. The Modify NE ID dialog box is displayed.. Ltd. right-click the NE whose ID needs to be changed. If the extended ID is not used. Click Modify NE ID. Choose Configuration > NE Attribute from the Function Tree. Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Object Attributes. Click Modify NE ID. the basic ID of an NE must be unique on the networks that are managed by the same NMS. 2.4 Changing the NE ID A.4 Parameter Description: Attribute_Changing NE IDs This topic describes the parameters that are used for changing NE IDs.

x. The letter x indicates the basic ID. Related Tasks 5. If the extended ID is not used. subnet mask.OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Commissioning Guide (U2000) A Parameters Description Parameters for Changing NE IDs Parameter New ID Value Range Default Value Description l The new ID refers to the basic ID.. do not change the extended ID.2 Changing the NE ID A. NOTE The NE ID consisting of the basic ID and extended ID identifies an NE on the NMS. the IP address of the NE is set to 129. and default gateway of the gateway NE should meet Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. the basic ID of an NE must be unique on the networks that are managed by the same NMS. 166 . an IP address is set according to the following rules: l The IP address. Description In the HWECC solution. Parameters for NE Communication Setting Parameter IP Address Value Range Default Value Before delivery. Choose Communication > Communication Parameters from the Function Tree. New Extended ID 1 to 254 9 If the number of existing NEs does not exceed the range represented by the basic ID.0. Navigation Path Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Ltd.5 Parameter Description: NE Communication Parameter Setting This topic describes the parameters that are used for NE communication setting.1. l This parameter is set according to the network plan.9.

Extended ID 1 to 254 9 NSAP Address - - This parameter is valid only when the OSI over DCC solution is applied. l It is recommended that this parameter takes the default value.0 Description the planning requirements of the external DCN. l The IP address of other NEs should be set according to the NE ID. if the ID is 0x090001. In this case.0 255. l If an NE uses the extended ECC. l Do not change the extended ID when the number of actual NEs does not exceed the range permitted by the basic NE ID.0..9.0.0. the IP address of an NE should be set in the format of 0x81000000+ID. the IP address must be in the same network segment.1.0. This parameter is used to set only the area ID of an NSAP address. 167 . Ltd. The other parts of the NSAP address are automatically generated by the NE.OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Commissioning Guide (U2000) A Parameters Description Parameter Gateway IP Address Subnet Mask Value Range - Default Value 0. the IP address should be set to 129.255. Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. That is.

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Commissioning Guide (U2000) A Parameters Description Parameter Connection Mode Value Range Common + Security SSL Common Security SSL Default Value Common + Security SSL Description l Specifies the connection mode that the gateway NE allows the NMS to use for connecting to the gateway NE.2. Navigation Path 1. 168 . l If the gateway NE has no special security requirement for connection to the NMS. l If the gateway NE requests secure connection to the NMS for preventing information interception and cracking. Connection Mode can be set to Common. l If NE communication security level needs to be the same as NMS communication security level. 2. l The default parameter value is recommended unless the gateway NE requires that the NMS use the SSL connection mode. Click the XPIC tab. Related Tasks 4. Ltd.6 Parameter Description: Link Configuration_XPIC Workgroup_Creation This topic describes the parameters that are related to the XPIC function. Choose Configuration > Link Configuration from the Function Tree.. Click New.6 Setting NE Communication Parameters 5. 3.4 Setting NE Communication Parameters A. Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. Connection Mode needs to be set to Security SSL. Connection Mode needs to be set to Common + Security SSL.1. l The parameter value takes effect only when it is set for a gateway NE and the gateway NE is connected to the NMS by means of the IP protocol.

These two parameters must be set to different values. l These two parameters are set according to the planning information. l Set Link ID-V and Link ID-H.OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Commissioning Guide (U2000) A Parameters Description Parameters Parameter IF Channel Bandwidth Value Range ISX2: 7M 14M 28M 40M 56M IFX2: 7M 14M 28M 56M Polarization Direction-V Polarization Direction-H l This parameter indicates the polarization direction of a radio link. Ltd. but Link ID-V must be set to the same value at both ends of a link and Link ID-H must also be set to the same value at both ends of a link. Default Value Description l This parameter specifies the channel spacing when the XPIC function is enabled. l A link ID is an identifier of a radio link and is used to prevent the radio links between sites from being wrongly connected. the high-power ODU must be used. Link ID-V Link ID-H 1 to 4094 1 2 Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. and set the IF port on the XPIC IF board that has a smaller slot number to Link ID-V and the IF port on the other XPIC IF board to Link ID-H. l When this parameter is set to 56M or 40M. l It is recommended that you install the two XPIC IF boards that form an XPIC workgroup in the slots that are at the same layer or in the same column.. 169 . l When the link ID received by an NE is different from the link ID set for the NE. the NE reports an MW_LIM alarm and inserts the AIS.

This parameter cannot be set to a value that exceeds the nominal power rang of the ODU in the guaranteed capacity modulation module.OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Commissioning Guide (U2000) A Parameters Description Parameter Transmit Power (dBm) Value Range - Default Value - Description l This parameter specifies the transmit power of an ODU. Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. l This parameter is set according to the planning information. and must not be more than the difference between the upper transmit frequency limit supported by the ODU and a half of the channel spacing. l This parameter is set according to the planning information. l This parameter is set to limit the maximum transmit power of the ODU within this preset range. Transmission Frequency(MHz) - - l This parameter indicates the channel central frequency. Ensure that the receive power of the ODU at the opposite end can ensure stable radio services. The value of this parameter must not exceed the rated power range supported by the ODU. Ltd. Maximum Transmit Power (dBm) - - l This parameter specifies the maximum transmit power of the ODU. l The value of this parameter must not be less than the sum of the lower transmit frequency limit supported by the ODU and a half of the channel spacing. 170 . l This parameter is set according to the planning information. l Consider the receive power of the ODU at the opposite end when you set this parameter. l The maximum transmit power adjusted by using the ATPC function should not exceed this value. l It is recommended that you set the transmit power of the ODU to the same value at both ends of a radio link..

. 171 . and the T/R spacing should be set according to the technical specifications of the ODU. indicating that the T/R spacing supported by the ODU is used. l In normal cases. Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. l If Station Type of the ODU is TX high. l The T/R spacing of the ODU should be set to the same value at both ends of a radio link. l When this parameter is set to unmute. l A valid T/R spacing value is determined by the ODU itself. Transmission Status unmute mute unmute l When this parameter is set to mute. If Station Type of the ODU is TX low. the transmit frequency is one T/R spacing lower than the receive frequency.OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Commissioning Guide (U2000) A Parameters Description Parameter T/R Spacing(MHz) Value Range - Default Value - Description l This parameter specifies the spacing between the transmit frequency and the receive frequency of an ODU to prevent mutual interference between the transmitter and the receiver. the transmit frequency is one T/R spacing higher than the receive frequency. l If the ODU supports only one T/R spacing. the ODU does not transmit microwave signals but can normally receive microwave signals. Ltd. the ODU normally transmits and receives microwave signals. this parameter is set to 0. Transmission Status is set to unmute.

the receiver notifies the transmitter to decrease or increase the transmit power until the RSL is within the range that is 2 dB higher or lower than the central value between the ATPC upper threshold and the ATPC lower threshold. Ltd. l The settings of the ATPC attributes must be consistent at both ends of a radio link.0 l The central value between the ATPC upper threshold and the ATPC lower threshold is set as the expected receive power.. l If this parameter is set to Enabled and if the RSL at the receive end is 2 dB higher or lower than the central value between the ATPC upper threshold and the ATPC lower threshold at the receive end. l It is recommended that you set ATPC Upper Threshold(dBm) to the sum of the planned central value between the ATPC upper threshold and the ATPC lower threshold and 10 dB. l During the commissioning process.0 -70. set this parameter to Disabled to ensure that the transmit power is not changed. l You can set the ATPC upper threshold only when ATPC Automatic Threshold Enable Status is set to Disabled. l In the case of areas where fast fading severely affects the radio transmission. Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. 172 . re-set the ATPC attributes. After the commissioning.OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Commissioning Guide (U2000) A Parameters Description Parameter ATPC Enabled Value Range Disabled Enabled Default Value Disabled Description l This parameter specifies whether the ATPC function is enabled. ATPC Upper Threshold(dBm) ATPC Lower Threshold(dBm) - -45. and ATPC Lower Threshold(dBm) to the difference between the planned central value between the ATPC upper threshold and the ATPC lower threshold and 10 dB. it is recommended that you set this parameter to Disabled.

This parameter indicates the link ID to which the polarization direction H corresponds. 173 ..2.OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Commissioning Guide (U2000) A Parameters Description Parameter ATPC Automatic Threshold Enable Status Value Range Disabled Enabled Default Value Disabled Description l This parameter specifies whether the ATPC automatic threshold function is enabled. Choose Configuration > Link Configuration from the Function Tree. Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Navigation Path 1. Polarization Direction-H Link ID-H - - Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co.10 Creating an XPIC Workgroup A. the equipment automatically uses the preset ATPC upper and lower thresholds according to the work mode of the radio link. This parameter indicates the IF port to which the polarization direction H corresponds. Parameters on the Main Interface Parameter Group ID Polarization Direction-V Link ID-V Value Range Default Value Description This parameter indicates the ID of the work group. Ltd.7 Parameter Description: Link Configuration_XPIC This topic describes the parameters that are related to the XPIC function. Related Tasks 4. 2. Click the XPIC tab. This parameter indicates the link ID to which the polarization direction V corresponds. This parameter indicates the IF port to which the polarization direction V corresponds. l If this parameter is set to Enabled.

0 l This parameter is used to set the expected receive power of the ODU and is mainly used in the antenna alignment stage. l After the antenna alignment. the antenna misalignment indicating function is disabled. after the state that the antenna is aligned lasts for 30 minutes. the high-power ODU must be used.. l When the antenna misalignment indicating function is enabled. l This parameter is set according to the planning information.0 to -20. l When this parameter is set to 56M or 40M. 300 ms off). l When this parameter takes the default value. the NE automatically enables the antenna misalignment indicating function. After this parameter is set. Ltd. indicating that the antenna is not aligned. if the actual receive power of the ODU is 3 dB lower than the power expected to be received. the ODU indicator on the IF board connected to the ODU blinks yellow (300 ms on. Power to Be Received -V(dBm) -90.0 -10. Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. 174 .OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Commissioning Guide (U2000) A Parameters Description Parameter IF Channel Bandwidth Value Range ISX2: 7M 14M 28M 40M 56M IFX2: 7M 14M 28M 56M Default Value - Description l IF Channel Bandwidth refers to the channel spacing of the corresponding radio links. l This parameter is set according to the planning information. the NE automatically disables the antenna misalignment indicating function.

if the actual receive power of the ODU is 3 dB lower than the power expected to be received. the ODU indicator on the IF board connected to the ODU blinks yellow (300 ms on. l This parameter is set according to the planning information. Ltd. l When this parameter takes the default value. Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. l When the antenna misalignment indicating function is enabled. indicating that the antenna is not aligned. 300 ms off). l The maximum transmit power adjusted by using the ATPC function should not exceed this value.. 175 . This parameter cannot be set to a value that exceeds the nominal power rang of the ODU in the guaranteed capacity modulation module. l This parameter is set to limit the maximum transmit power of the ODU within this preset range.0 Description l This parameter is used to set the expected receive power of the ODU and is mainly used in the antenna alignment stage.0 to -20. the antenna misalignment indicating function is disabled. l This parameter is set according to the planning information.OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Commissioning Guide (U2000) A Parameters Description Parameter Power to Be Received -H(dBm) Value Range -90.0 Default Value -10. the NE automatically disables the antenna misalignment indicating function. after the state that the antenna is aligned lasts for 30 minutes. Maximum Transmit Power (dBm) - - l This parameter specifies the maximum transmit power of the ODU. the NE automatically enables the antenna misalignment indicating function. l After the antenna alignment. After this parameter is set.

This parameter cannot be set to a value that exceeds the nominal power range of the ODU. l This parameter needs to be set according to the planning information. 176 . Ensure that the receive power of the ODU at the opposite end can ensure stable radio services. namely.. l The value of this parameter must not be less than the sum of the lower TX frequency limit supported by the ODU and a half of the channel spacing. Transmission Frequency(MHz) - - l This parameter indicates or specifies the transmit frequency of the ODU. l The difference between the transmit frequencies of both the ends of a radio link should be one T/R spacing.OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Commissioning Guide (U2000) A Parameters Description Parameter Transmit Power (dBm) Value Range - Default Value - Description l This parameter indicates or specifies the transmit power of the ODU. Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. l It is recommended that you set the transmit power of the ODU to the same value at both ends of a radio link. l Consider the receive power of the ODU at the opposite end when you set this parameter. the channel central frequency. and must not be more than the difference between the upper TX frequency limit supported by the ODU and a half of the channel spacing. Ltd. l This parameter is set according to the planning information.

Transmission Status unmute mute unmute l This parameter indicates or specifies the transmit status of the ODU. 177 . Ltd. If the ODU is a Tx low station. the transmitter of the ODU does not work but can normally receive microwave signals. the transmit frequency is one T/R spacing lower than the receive frequency. l If this parameter is set to mute. and the T/R spacing should be set according to the technical specifications of the ODU. l If the ODU supports only one T/R spacing. l If this parameter is set to unmute. l If the ODU is a Tx high station. this parameter is set to unmute. This parameter indicates the IF port to which the polarization direction H or the polarization direction V corresponds. l A valid T/R spacing value is determined by the ODU itself.OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Commissioning Guide (U2000) A Parameters Description Parameter T/R Spacing(MHz) Value Range - Default Value - Description l This parameter indicates or specifies the spacing between the transmit frequency and receive frequency of the ODU to prevent mutual interference between the transmitter and receiver. Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co.. the ODU can normally transmit and receive microwave signals. this parameter is set to 0. Parameters for Hybrid/AM Configuration Parameter Group ID Polarization direction Value Range Default Value Description This parameter indicates the ID of the work group. l The T/R spacing of the ODU should be set to the same value at both ends of a radio link. indicating that the T/R spacing supported by the ODU is used. the transmit frequency is one T/R spacing higher than the receive frequency. l In normal cases.

NOTE Modulation Mode of the Full AM Capacity must be higher than Modulation Mode of the Guarantee AM Capacity. you need to select Manually Specified Modulation Mode. Ltd. This parameter is valid only when AM Enable Status is set to Enabled. This parameter is valid only when AM Enable Status is set to Enabled. In this case.. the value of this parameter is determined by the bandwidth of the services that need to be transmitted over the Hybrid radio and the availability of the radio link that corresponds to this modulation scheme. the radio link uses only the specified modulation scheme. the radio link uses the corresponding modulation scheme according to the channel conditions. Generally. Hence. Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. l When AM Enable Status is set to Enabled.OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Commissioning Guide (U2000) A Parameters Description Parameter AM Enable Status Value Range Disabled Enabled Default Value Disabled Description l When AM Enable Status is set to Disabled. This parameter is set according to the planning information. Modulation Mode of the Full AM Capacity QPSK 16QAM 32QAM 64QAM 128QAM 256QAM This parameter specifies the highest-gain modulation scheme that the AM function supports. 178 . Modulation Mode of the Guarantee AM Capacity QPSK 16QAM 32QAM 64QAM 128QAM 256QAM - This parameter specifies the highest-gain modulation scheme that the AM function supports. the Hybrid radio can ensure the reliable transmission of the E1 services and provide bandwidth adaptively for the Ethernet services when the AM function is enabled. NOTE Modulation Mode of the Full AM Capacity must be higher than Modulation Mode of the Guarantee AM Capacity. This parameter is set according to the planning information. the value of this parameter is determined by the bandwidth of the services that need to be transmitted over the Hybrid radio and the availability of the radio link that corresponds to this modulation scheme. Generally.

ATPC Upper Threshold(dBm) l Set the central value between the ATPC upper threshold and the ATPC lower Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. l This parameter specifies whether the ATPC function is enabled. l If this parameter is set to Enabled and if the RSL at the receive end is 2 dB higher or lower than the central value between the ATPC upper threshold and the ATPC lower threshold at the receive end.. l The settings of the ATPC attributes must be consistent at both ends of a radio link. it is recommended that you set this parameter to Disabled. the receiver notifies the transmitter to decrease or increase the transmit power until the RSL is within the range that is 2 dB higher or lower than the central value between the ATPC upper threshold and the ATPC lower threshold. After the commissioning. re-set the ATPC attributes. 179 . Ltd. Transmit-End Modulation Mode Receive-End Modulation Mode - - Displays the modulation mode at the transmit end. This parameter is valid only when AM Enable Status is set to Disabled.OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Commissioning Guide (U2000) A Parameters Description Parameter Manually Specified Modulation Mode Value Range QPSK 16QAM 32QAM 64QAM 128QAM 256QAM Default Value QPSK Description This parameter specifies the modulation scheme that the radio link uses for signal transmission. Displays the modulation mode at the receive end. Parameters for ATPC Management Parameter Group ID ATPC Enable Status Value Range Disabled Enabled Default Value Description This parameter indicates the object to be set. set this parameter to Disabled to ensure that the transmit power is not changed. l In the case of areas where fast fading severely affects the radio transmission. l During the commissioning process.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. l This parameter specifies whether the ATPC automatic threshold function is enabled. Navigation Path 1. the equipment automatically uses the preset ATPC upper and lower thresholds according to the work mode of the radio link. l If this parameter is set to Disabled. 2. Click New.11 Setting the Hybrid/AM Attributes of the XPIC Workgroup A. 180 . Ltd. you need to manually set ATPC Upper Threshold(dBm) and ATPC Lower Threshold(dBm).8 Parameter Description: Link Configuration_IF 1+1 Protection This topic describes the parameters that are related to IF 1+1 protection. l It is recommended that you set ATPC Upper Threshold(dBm) to the sum of the planned central value between the ATPC upper threshold and the ATPC lower threshold and 10 dB.. l If this parameter is set to Enabled. Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. ATPC Automatic Threshold Enable Status Disabled Enabled - Related Tasks 4. and ATPC Lower Threshold(dBm) o the difference between the planned central value between the ATPC upper threshold and the ATPC lower threshold and 10 dB.OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Commissioning Guide (U2000) A Parameters Description Parameter ATPC Lower Threshold(dBm) Value Range - Default Value - Description threshold to a value for the expected receive power.2. l You can set this parameter only when ATPC Automatic Threshold Enable Status is set to Disabled. Choose Configuration > Link Configuration > IF 1+1 Protection from the Function Tree.

the system uses two antennas that have a space distance between them. l It is recommended that you set this parameter to Revertive Mode. Revertive Mode Revertive Mode Non-Revertive Mode Revertive Mode l This parameter specifies the revertive mode of the IF 1+1 protection. Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. the impact of the fading on signal transmission is reduced. The remote end selects signals from the two received signals. l In HSB mode. l In SD mode. the impact of the fading on signal transmission is reduced. Ltd. 181 . With SD protection. l When this parameter is set to Revertive Mode.. the system uses two channels that have a frequency spacing between them. to receive the same signal. to transmit and receive the same signal. The equipment selects signals from the two received signals. With FD protection. l The FD mode and SD mode are compatible with the HSB switching function. the NE that is in the switching state keeps the current state unchanged unless another switching occurs even though the former working channel is restored to normal. the NE that is in the switching state releases the switching and enables the former working channel to return to the normal state some time after the former working channel is restored to normal. the equipment provides a 1+1 hot standby configuration for the IF board and ODU at both ends of each hop of a radio link to realize the protection. l In FD mode.OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Commissioning Guide (U2000) A Parameters Description Parameters Parameter Working Mode Value Range HSB FD SD Default Value HSB Description l This parameter specifies the working mode of the IF 1+1 protection. l When this parameter is set to NonRevertive Mode. l This parameter is set according to the network plan.

Enable Reverse Switching Enabled Disabled Enabled l This parameter indicates whether the reverse switching function is enabled.. l This parameter is valid only when Working Mode is set to HSB or SD. When this parameter at the source end is set to Enabled and the reverse switching conditions are met. they send the alarms to the source end by using the MWRDI overhead in the microwave frame. 182 . This parameter specifies the protection board of the protection group. l When the time after the former working channel is restored to normal reaches the set WTR time. it is recommended that you set this parameter to Enabled. l You can set WTR Time(s) only when Revertive Mode is set to Revertive Mode. a revertive switching occurs. Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. l In normal cases.OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Commissioning Guide (U2000) A Parameters Description Parameter WTR Time(s) Value Range 300 to 720 Default Value 600 Description l This parameter specifies the wait-torestore (WTR) time. l It is recommended that you use the default value. Working Board Protection Board - - This parameter specifies the working board of the protection group. the IF 1+1 protection switching occurs at the source end. Ltd. l When both the main IF board and the standby IF board at the sink end report service alarms.

l When Alarm Report Mode is set to Protection group and board alarms. 2.8 Creating an IF 1+1 Protection Group A. protection group alarms are reported to indicate radio link faults. and Enable Reverse Switching must be set to the same value at both ends of a radio hop. Revertive Mode. Choose Configuration > IF 1+1 Protection from the Function Tree.2. a protection group does not report an alarm immediately after it is degraded. Anti-jitter Time 0 to 600 - l When Anti-jitter Time(s) is not set to 0. 183 . l It is recommended that Anti-jitter Time (s) take its default value. Navigation Path 1. alarms are reported if a protection group fails or degrades and suppress IF board alarms and radio link alarms. Click Create. l It is recommended that you set Alarm Report Mode to Only protection group alarms. NOTE Each of the parameters Working Mode. l When Alarm Report Mode is set to Only protection group alarms.OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Commissioning Guide (U2000) A Parameters Description Parameter Alarm Report Mode Value Range Only board alarms Only Protection group alarms Protection group and board alarms Default Value - Description l When Alarm Report Mode is set to Only board alarms.. IF board alarms and protection group alarms are reported.9 Parameter Description: IF 1+1 Protection_Create This topic describes the parameters that are used for creating an IF 1+1 protection group. WTR Time(s). only IF board alarms are reported. NOTE The faulty board reports related fault alarms regardless of parameter settings. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. Related Tasks 4. but reports the alarm after the specified anti-jitter time expires. In this case. Ltd. Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer.

to receive the same signal. the impact of the fading on signal transmission is reduced. the NE that is in the switching state keeps the current state unchanged unless another switching occurs even though the former working channel is restored to normal. l When Working Mode is set to HSB. the NE that is in the switching state releases the switching and enables the former working channel to return to the normal state some time after the former working channel is restored to normal. the impact of the fading on signal transmission is reduced. the system uses two antennas that have a space distance between them.. l When Working Mode is set to FD. 184 . l When Revertive Mode is set to Revertive Mode. l The FD mode and SD mode are compatible with the HSB switching function. The equipment selects signals from the two received signals. l When Revertive Mode is set to NonRevertive. Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. l When Working Mode is set to SD. to transmit and receive the same signal. The remote end selects signals from the two received signals. the system uses two channels that have a frequency spacing between them. Ltd. Revertive Mode Revertive Mode Non-Revertive Revertive Mode l This parameter specifies the revertive mode of the IF 1+1 protection. l This parameter is set according to the network plan. With FD protection.OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Commissioning Guide (U2000) A Parameters Description Parameters Parameter Working Mode Value Range HSB FD SD Default Value HSB Description l This parameter specifies the working mode of the IF 1+1 protection. With SD protection. the equipment provides a 1+1 hot standby configuration for the IF board and ODU at both ends of each hop of a radio link to realize the protection. It is recommended that you set this parameter to Revertive Mode.

It is recommended that you use the default value. Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. it is recommended that you set Enable Reverse Switching to Disabled. if Working Mode is set to HSB. 185 . Enable Reverse Switching Enabled Disabled Enabled l This parameter indicates whether the reverse switching function is enabled.OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Commissioning Guide (U2000) A Parameters Description Parameter WTR Time(s) Value Range 300 to 720 Default Value 600 Description l This parameter specifies the wait-torestore (WTR) time. it is recommended that you set Enable Reverse Switching to Enabled. if Working Mode is set to SD. When Enable Reverse Switching at the source end is set to Enabled and the reverse switching conditions are met. Working Board Protection Board - - This parameter specifies the working board of the protection group. the IF 1+1 protection switching occurs at the source end. l You can set WTR Time(s) only when Revertive Mode is set to Revertive Mode. l Generally. Ltd. l When both the main IF board and the standby IF board at the sink end report service alarms. This parameter specifies the protection board of the protection group. l When the time after the former working channel is restored to normal reaches the set WTR Time(s). a revertive switching occurs.. they send the alarms to the source end by using the MWRDI overhead in the microwave frame. l Enable Reverse Switching is valid only when Working Mode is set to HSB or SD.

NOTE Each of the parameters Working Mode. Related Tasks 5. In this case.Anti-jitter Time(s) and Enable Reverse Switching must be set to the same value at both ends of a radio hop. Anti-jitter Time(s) 0 to 600 300 l When Anti-jitter Time(s) is not set to 0. 186 Issue 01 (2011-10-30) . IF board alarms and protection group alarms are reported. WTR Time(s). protection group alarms are reported to indicate radio link faults. alarms are reported if a protection group fails or degrades and suppress IF board alarms and radio link alarms. l When Alarm Report Mode is set to Only protection group alarms.1..10 Parameter: Link Configuration_IF/ODU Configuration This topic describes the parameters that are used for configuring the IF/ODU.OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Commissioning Guide (U2000) A Parameters Description Parameter Alarm Report Mode Value Range Only board alarms Only protection group alarms Protection group and board alarms Default Value Only board alarms Description l When Alarm Report Mode is set to Only board alarms. Navigation Path 1.6 Creating an IF 1+1 Protection Group A. Ltd. NOTE The faulty board reports related fault alarms regardless of parameter settings. l It is recommended that Anti-jitter Time (s) take its default value. Revertive Mode. only IF board alarms are reported. l It is recommended that you set Alarm Report Mode to Only protection group alarms. l When Alarm Report Mode is set to Protection group and board alarms. select the NE and then choose Configuration > Link Configuration from the Function Tree. but reports the alarm after the specified anti-jitter time expires. a protection group does not report an alarm immediately after it is degraded. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. In the NE Explorer.

14MHz.28MHz. 128QAM 13.7MHz. 32QAM 11. Parameters for Configuring the IF Parameter Work Mode Value Range 1. 16QAM 7.4E1. The work modes of the IF boards at the two ends of a radio link must be the same.28MHz. 64QAM 12. 32QAM 15.8E1.16E1.QPSK 2.16E1.14MHz. Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. 16QAM 3.28MHz.7MHz. l This parameter is set according to the network plan. NOTE The IF1 board supports this parameter.28MHz.35E1.22E1.4E1. service capacity..STM-1.5MHz. Click the IF/ODU Configuration tab.53E1.QPS K 4.14MHz. channel spacing.44E1. 187 . 128QAM 10. 16QAM 14.14MHz.14MHz.28MHz.3.QP SK 6. 16QAM 5. 64QAM Default Value Description l This parameter indicates or specifies the work mode of the radio link in "work mode number. Ltd.32E1.8E1.OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Commissioning Guide (U2000) A Parameters Description 2.26E1. modulation mode" format.

NOTE The ISU2 and ISX2 boards support this parameter. the local end inserts the AIS signal to the downstream direction of the service.. 188 . IF Service Type Hybrid(Native E1 +ETH) Hybrid(Native STM-1+ETH) SDH Hybrid(Native E1 +ETH) l Displays or specifies the type of services carried by the IF board. l If the SDH radio transmits SDH services. l If the value of Received Radio Link ID does not match the preset value of Radio Link ID at the local end. l Link ID is set according to the network plan. indicating that the link IDs do not match. l When the radio link becomes faulty.OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Commissioning Guide (U2000) A Parameters Description Parameter Link ID Value Range 1 to 4094 Default Value 1 Description l Link ID indicates or specifies the ID of a radio link. the local end reports an alarm to the NMS. As the identifier of a radio link. Received Link ID - - l This parameter indicates the received ID of the radio link. l If the Integrated IP radio transmits Native E1 services. the local end reports MW_LIM alarm to the NMS. Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. At the same time. this parameter is displayed as an invalid value. the local end inserts the AIS signal to the downstream direction of the service. set this parameter to Hybrid(Native STM-1 +ETH). this parameter is used to prevent incorrect connections of radio links between sites. indicating that the link IDs do not match. l If the value of Received Radio Link ID does not match the preset value of Link ID at the local end. Each radio link of an NE should have a unique link ID. and the link IDs at both ends of a radio link should be the same. set this parameter to SDH. l If the Integrated IP radio transmits Native STM-1 services. Ltd. At the same time. set this parameter to Hybrid(Native E1+ETH).

l The ISX2/ISU2 does not support the AM function when IF Service Type is SDH. 189 . the radio link uses only the specified modulation scheme. l When AM Enable Status is set to Disabled.5M 7M 14M 28M 40M 56M Default Value - Description IF Channel Bandwidth indicates the channel spacing of the corresponding radio link. l When AM Enable Status is set to Enabled.5M only for the ISU2 board.. l The IFX2 board does not support the values 40M. Manually Specified Modulation Mode QPSK 16QAM 32QAM 64QAM 128QAM 256QAM QPSK l This parameter specifies the modulation scheme that the radio link uses for signal transmission. the AM function is unavailable and AM Enable Status must be set to Disabled. NOTE This parameter is not applicable to the IF1 board. l The IFU2 board does not support the value 40M.5M for the ISU2 board. Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. the radio link uses the corresponding modulation scheme according to the channel conditions. l IF Channel Bandwidth can be set to 3. AM Mode AM Enable Status Disabled Enabled Disabled This parameter is not applicable to the OptiX RTN 950. the Integrated IP radio can ensure the reliable transmission of the E1 services and provide bandwidth adaptively for the Ethernet services when the AM function is enabled. l Hence. Ltd. In this case. l This parameter is valid only when AM Enable Status is set to Disabled. NOTE l This parameter is not applicable to the IF1 board. l When IF Channel Bandwidth is 3. NOTE This parameter is not applicable to the IF1 board. This parameter is set according to the network plan. you need to select Manually Specified Modulation Mode.OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Commissioning Guide (U2000) A Parameters Description Parameter IF Channel Bandwidth Value Range 3.

NOTE This parameter is not applicable to the IF1 board. Generally. STM-1 Capacity - - l Specifies the STM-1 capacity of the IF board. Generally. NOTE This parameter is not applicable to the IF1 board. l Modulation Mode of the Guarantee AM Capacity specifies the lowest-order modulation scheme that the AM function supports.. This parameter is set according to the network plan. Ltd. l Modulation Mode of the Full AM Capacity specifies the highest-order modulation scheme that the AM function supports. This parameter is set according to the network plan. and IFX2 boards do not support this parameter. NOTE Modulation Mode of the Full AM Capacity must be higher than Modulation Mode of the Guarantee AM Capacity.OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Commissioning Guide (U2000) A Parameters Description Parameter Modulation Mode of the Guarantee AM Capacity Value Range QPSK 16QAM 32QAM 64QAM 128QAM 256QAM Default Value QPSK Description l This parameter is valid only when AM Enable Status is set to Enabled. IFU2. the value of this parameter is determined by the service transmission bandwidth that the Hybrid radio must ensure and the availability of the radio link that corresponds to this modulation scheme. Modulation Mode of the Full AM Capacity QPSK 16QAM 32QAM 64QAM 128QAM 256QAM QPSK l This parameter is valid only when AM Enable Status is set to Enabled. Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. l If IF Service Type is SDH. NOTE The IF1. l This parameter is available only when IF Service Type is set to Hybrid(Native STM-1+ETH) and SDH. 190 . this parameter can be set to 1 or 2. this parameter can be set to 0 or 1. the value of this parameter is determined by the bandwidth of the services that need to be transmitted over the Hybrid radio and the availability of the radio link that corresponds to this modulation scheme. l If IF Service Type is Hybrid(Native STM-1+ETH).

this parameter needs to be set according to IF Channel Bandwidth. and the actually transmitted services. and the actually transmitted services. Ltd. this parameter is available when IF Service Type is Hybrid(Native E1+ETH).OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Commissioning Guide (U2000) A Parameters Description Parameter Guarantee E1 Capacity Value Range - Default Value - Description l If AM Enable Status is set to Enabled. NOTE This parameter is not applicable to the IF1 board.. l For the ISU2 and ISX2 boards. this parameter is available when IF Service Type is Hybrid(Native E1+ETH). Manually Specified Modulation Mode. Modulation Mode of the Guarantee AM Capacity. l For the ISU2 and ISX2 boards. this parameter needs to be set according to IF Channel Bandwidth. - - Disabled Enabled Disabled Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. Guarantee E1 Capacity Range Data Service Bandwidth(Mbit/ s) Enable E1 Priority - - Displays the E1 capacity range of the IF board in guarantee capacity modulation mode. 191 . Displays the data service bandwidth of the IF board. l If AM Enable Status is set to Disabled. NOTE This parameter is not applicable to the IF1 board. l This parameter specifies whether to enable the E1 priority function. l This parameter is valid only when AM Enable Status is set to Enabled.

this parameter is available when IF Service Type is Hybrid(Native E1+ETH). l The difference between the transmit frequencies of both the ends of a radio link should be one T/R spacing. l This parameter is valid if Enable E1 Priority is set to Enabled. l The Full E1 Capacity must be set to the same value at both ends of a radio link. namely.. and must not be more than the difference between the upper TX frequency limit supported by the ODU and a half of the channel spacing. the number of E1 services in full capacity modulation mode should be smaller than or equal to the maximum number of E1 services in full capacity modulation mode.Service bandwidth in guarantee capacity mode + E1 service bandwidth in guarantee capacity mode.OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Commissioning Guide (U2000) A Parameters Description Parameter Full E1 Capacity Value Range - Default Value - Description l This parameter specifies the number of transmitted E1 services in Modulation Mode of the Full AM Capacity. In addition. l E1 service bandwidth in full capacity mode ≤ Service bandwidth in full capacity mode . Ltd. NOTE This parameter is not applicable to the IF1 board. Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. Full E1 Capacity Range - - Displays the E1 capacity range of the IF board in full capacity modulation mode. Parameters for Configuring the RF Parameter TX Frequency (MHz) Value Range Default Value Description l This parameter indicates or specifies the transmit frequency of the ODU. l The value of this parameter must not be less than the sum of the lower TX frequency limit supported by the ODU and a half of the channel spacing. l For the ISU2 and ISX2 boards. 192 . l This parameter needs to be set according to the network plan. the channel central frequency.

Actual T/R Spacing(MHz) - - This parameter indicates the actual T/R spacing of the ODU. l A valid T/R spacing value is determined by the ODU itself. and the T/R spacing should be set according to the technical specifications of the ODU.OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Commissioning Guide (U2000) A Parameters Description Parameter Range of TX Frequency(MHz) Value Range - Default Value - Description l This parameter indicates the range of the transmit frequency of the ODU. l This parameter specifies the spacing between the transmit frequency and the receive frequency of an ODU to prevent interference between them. 193 . indicating that the T/R spacing supported by the ODU is used. l The Range of Frequency(MHz) depends on the specifications of the ODU. the TX frequency is one T/R spacing higher than the receive frequency. l The T/R spacing of the ODU should be set to the same value at both the ends of a radio link. Ltd. This parameter indicates the actual receive frequency of the ODU. Actual TX Frequency(MHz) Actual RX Frequency(MHz) T/R Spacing(MHz) - - This parameter indicates the actual transmit frequency of the ODU. set this parameter to 0. Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co.. If Station Type of the ODU is TX low. l If Station Type of the ODU is TX high. the TX frequency is one T/R spacing lower than the receive frequency. l If the ODU supports only one T/R spacing.

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Commissioning Guide (U2000) A Parameters Description Parameters for Configuring the Power Parameter TX Power(dBm) Value Range Default Value Description l This parameter indicates or specifies the transmit power of the ODU. This parameter cannot be set to a value that exceeds the nominal power range of the ODU. l This parameter cannot take a value greater than the preset value of Maximum Transmit Power(dBm). the queried actual transmit power may be different from the preset value. Ensure that the receive power of the ODU at the opposite end can ensure stable radio services. l If the ATPC function is enabled. l It is recommended that you set the transmit power of the ODU to the same value at both ends of a radio link. Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. 194 .. Range of TX Power(dBm) Actual TX Power (dBm) This parameter indicates the range of the transmit power of the ODU. l Consider the receive power of the ODU at the opposite end when you set this parameter. l This parameter needs to be set according to the network plan. Ltd. l This parameter indicates the actual transmit power of the ODU.

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Commissioning Guide (U2000) A Parameters Description Parameter Power to Be Received(dBm) Value Range -90. 300 ms off). Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. l After the antenna alignment. After this parameter is set. 195 . if the actual receive power of the ODU is 3 dB lower than the power expected to be received.. l When the antenna misalignment indicating function is enabled.0 Description l Power to Be Received(dBm) is used to set the expected receive power of the ODU and is mainly used in the antenna alignment stage. the ODU indicator on the IF board connected to the ODU blinks yellow (300 ms on. indicating that the antenna is not aligned. l This parameter is set according to the network plan. the NE automatically disables the antenna misalignment indicating function.0 to -20. after the state that the antenna is aligned lasts for 30 minutes.0).0 Default Value -10. l When this parameter is set to Unmute. Actual TX Status - - This parameter indicates the actual transmit status of the ODU. l This parameter indicates or specifies the transmit status of the ODU. the antenna misalignment indicating function is disabled. l When this parameter is set to Mute. the NE automatically enables the antenna misalignment indicating function. it is recommended that you set TX Status to unmute. When the antenna non-alignment indication function is enabled. Ltd. Actual RX Power (dBm) TX Status Unmute Mute Unmute This parameter indicates the actual receive power of the ODU. the ODU can normally transmit and receive microwave signals. l When Power to Be Received(dBm) takes the default value (-10. l In normal cases. the transmitter of the ODU does not work but can normally receive microwave signals.

Transmission Power Level - - Related Tasks 4. Parameters Parameter Port Value Range Default Value Description This parameter indicates the corresponding IF interface. Choose Configuration > IF Interface from the Function Tree. This parameter indicates the level of the output power of the ODU..9 Configuring the IF/ODU Information of a Radio Link 5. l PDH and SDH indicate the transmission capacity only and are irrelevant to the type of transmitted service. 196 .1.2. l This parameter indicates the equipment type of the ODU. Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co.7 Configuring the IF/ODU Information of a Radio Link A. Click the ATPC Attributes tab. Navigation Path l l Select the corresponding board from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Ltd. Produce SN This parameter indicates the manufacturing serial number and the manufacturer code of the ODU. Station Type l This parameter indicates whether the ODU is a Tx high station or a Tx low station.11 Parameter Description: IF Interface_ATPC Attribute This topic describes the parameters that are related to the ATPC attributes. l The transmit frequency of a Tx high station is one T/R spacing higher than the transmit frequency of a Tx low station.OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Commissioning Guide (U2000) A Parameters Description Equipment Information Parameter Frequency(GHz) Equip Type Value Range Default Value Description This parameter indicates the frequency band where the ODU operates.

Ltd.OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Commissioning Guide (U2000) A Parameters Description Parameter ATPC Enable Status Value Range Disabled Enabled Default Value Disabled Description l This parameter specifies whether the ATPC function is enabled. l During the commissioning process. l When this parameter is set to Enabled and if the RSL at the receive end is 2 dB higher or lower than the central value between the ATPC upper threshold and the ATPC lower threshold at the receive end. re-set the ATPC attributes.. l It is recommended that you set ATPC Upper Threshold(dBm) to the sum of the planned central value between the ATPC upper threshold and the ATPC lower threshold and 10 dB.0 -70. l The settings of the ATPC attributes must be consistent at both ends of a radio link. and ATPC Lower Threshold(dBm) to the difference between the planned central value between the ATPC upper threshold and the ATPC lower threshold and 10 dB. the receiver notifies the transmitter to decrease or increase the transmit power until the RSL is within the range that is 2 dB higher or lower than the central value between the ATPC upper threshold and the ATPC lower threshold. After the commissioning. it is recommended that you set ATPC Enable Status to Disabled. Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. ATPC Upper Threshold(dBm) ATPC Lower Threshold(dBm) - -45. l You can set the ATPC upper threshold only when ATPC Automatic Threshold(dBm) is set to Disabled. l In the case of areas where fast fading severely affects the radio transmission. set this parameter to Disabled to ensure that the transmit power is not changed. 197 .0 l Set the central value between the ATPC upper threshold and the ATPC lower threshold to a value for the expected receive power.

you need to manually set ATPC Upper Automatic Threshold(dBm) and ATPC Lower Automatic Threshold(dBm). Parameters for NE Time Synchronization Parameter NE Name NE ID Value Range Default Value Description This parameter indicates the name of the NE. Ltd.. ATPC Upper Automatic Threshold(dBm) ATPC Lower Automatic Threshold(dBm) - - - - l This parameter indicates that the equipment automatically uses the preset ATPC upper and lower thresholds. Click the NE Time Synchronization tab. l If ATPC Automatic Threshold Enable Status is set to Enabled. This parameter indicates the ID of the NE.OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Commissioning Guide (U2000) A Parameters Description Parameter ATPC Automatic Threshold Enable Status Value Range Enabled Disabled Default Value Disabled Description l This parameter specifies whether the ATPC automatic threshold function is enabled. Choose Configuration > NE Batch Configuration > NE Time Synchronization from the Main Menu. Navigation Path 1. l If ATPC Automatic Threshold Enable Status is set to Disabled.12 Parameter Description: NE Time Synchronization This topic describes the parameters that are used for synchronizing the time of NEs. Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. 2. 198 . the equipment automatically uses the preset ATPC upper and lower thresholds according to the work mode of the radio link. A. l This parameter is valid only when ATPC Automatic Threshold Enable Status is set to Enabled.

l If the NE functions as a non-gateway NE and communicates with the gateway NE through the IP protocol. this parameter is set to NE ID.. the NE synchronizes the time of the NMS server. this parameter is set to IP. l If the NE functions as a non-gateway NE and communicates with the gateway NE through the HWECC protocol.OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Commissioning Guide (U2000) A Parameters Description Parameter Synchronous Mode Value Range Standard NTP NM Null Default Value Null Description l If this parameter is set to NM. this parameter is set to IP. Standard NTP Authentication Enabled Disabled Disabled This parameter is valid only when Synchronous Mode is set to Standard NTP. l If this parameter is set to Standard NTP. Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. 199 . Parameters for the Standard NTP Server Parameter Standard NTP Server Identifier Value Range NE ID IP Default Value NE ID Description l If the NE functions as the gateway NE. the NE synchronizes the Network Time Protocol (NTP) server through the standard NTP. Ltd.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. After this parameter is specified.OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Commissioning Guide (U2000) A Parameters Description Parameter Standard NTP Server Value Range - Default Value - Description l If the NE functions as the gateway NE. the authentication is performed according to the allocated key of the NTP server. Standard NTP Server Key 0 to 1024 0 l If the NTP server does not need to authenticated. l If the NE functions as a non-gateway NE. 200 . l It is recommended that you use the default value. this parameter is set to the value "0".. Ltd. the NMS and the NE synchronize the time once at the intervals of Synchronization Period(days). In this case. Parameters for Setting Automatic Synchronization Parameter Synchronization Starting Time Value Range Default Value Description l This parameter specifies the start time of the synchronization period. this parameter is set to the ID or IP address of the gateway NE. the NE authenticates the NTP server based on the key and the corresponding password (specified in the management of the standard NTP key). l If the NTP server needs to be authenticated. this parameter is set to the IP address of the external NTP server.

Synchronization Period (days) 1 to 300 1 l This parameter indicates the period of synchronizing the time of the NE with the time of the NMS. Choose Configuration > SDH Service Configuration from the Function Tree. Click Create.1. Navigation Path 1. Ltd.OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Commissioning Guide (U2000) A Parameters Description Parameter DST Value Range Selected Deselected Default Value Deselected Description l This parameter indicates whether Synchronization Starting Time is the daylight saving time. l This parameter is set according to the actual situation. Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Related Tasks 5. 2.9 Synchronizing the NE Time 5. Click Options to change the VC-12 timeslot numbering policy used by the crossconnection.9 Synchronizing the NE Time A.13 Parameter Description: SDH Service Configuration_Creation This parameter describes the parameters that are used for creating point-to-point crossconnections. Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. l It is recommended that you use the default value.1.. 3. 201 .

1. or use the endash (-) to represent a consecutive number. Source Timeslot Range(e. l This parameter cannot be set when Source Slot is set to the slot of the tributary board. For example. 4. set this parameter to VC4. l If the service is an E1 service or a data service that is bound with VC-12 channels. l This parameter is set according to the network plan. use the comma (. Source Slot Source VC4 This parameter specifies the slot of the service source.OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Commissioning Guide (U2000) A Parameters Description Parameters Parameter Level Value Range VC12 VC3 VC4 Default Value VC12 Description l This parameter specifies the level of the service to be created. create only the crossconnections from the service source to the service sink.3-6) l This parameter indicates the timeslot range of the service source.) to separate the discrete numbers. l This parameter specifies the number of the VC-4 channel where the service source is located.g. Ltd. l If all the services on a VC-4 channel pass through the NE. set this parameter to VC12. l If the service is a data service that is bound with VC-3 channels. 3. When setting this parameter to several numbers. and 3-6 indicate 1. it is recommended that you set this parameter to Bidirectional. create the crossconnections from the service source to the service sink and the crossconnections from the service sink to the service source. l This parameter can be set to a number or several numbers. l In normal cases. Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co.. the numbers 1. set this parameter to VC3. l When this parameter is set to Bidirectional. and 6. 202 . 5. Direction Bidirectional Unidirectional Bidirectional l When this parameter is set to Unidirectional.

l To immediately deliver the configured SDH service to the NE. and 6. This parameter is available only if the E1 priority function is enabled for the ports configured in the cross-connections. l If E1 Priority is set to Low. l This parameter can be set to a number or several numbers. Ltd.3-6) - - l This parameter specifies the timeslot range of the service sink. 4. transmission of the E1 service is ensured only in fullcapacity modulation scheme l If the service priority is not specified during service creation. l If E1 Priority is set to High. Activate Immediately Yes No Yes l This parameter specifies whether to immediately activate the configured service. When setting this parameter to several numbers. Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. transmission of the E1 service is ensured in any modulation scheme. 5. l This parameter specifies the number of the VC-4 channel where the service sink is located. the E1 priority of a service needs to be changed after the service is created.OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Commissioning Guide (U2000) A Parameters Description Parameter Sink Slot Sink VC4 Value Range - Default Value - Description This parameter specifies the slot of the service sink.) to separate the discrete numbers. E1 Priority is None. In this case. l This parameter is set according to the network plan. Sink Timeslot Range(e. For example. and 3-6 indicate 1.. set this parameter to Yes.1. or use the endash (-) to represent a consecutive number. use the comma (. E1 Priority High Low None - l This parameter specifies the priority of an E1 service. the numbers 1. 3. l This parameter cannot be set when Sink Slot is set to the slot of the tributary board.g. 203 .

l The internal clock source is always at the lowest priority and indicates that the NE works in the free-run mode. Click the System Clock Source Priority List tab. Navigation Path 1.14 Parameter Description: Clock Source Priority Table This topic describes the parameters that are related to the priority table of a clock source.1. Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer.10 Creating the Cross-Connections of Point-to-Point Services A. l The clock sources and the corresponding clock source priority levels are determined according to the clock synchronization schemes. 2.. 204 .OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Commissioning Guide (U2000) A Parameters Description Related Tasks 5. Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. Parameters Parameter Clock Source Value Range Default Value Description l External clock source 1 indicates the external clock source at the CLK or TIME1 port on the CST or CSH board in physical slot 7. Choose Configuration > Clock > Physical Clock > Clock Source Priority. Ltd. External clock source 2 indicates the external clock source at the CLK or TIME1 port on the CST or CSH board in physical slot 8.

Clock Source Priority Sequence (Highest: 1) - - Displays the priority sequence of clock sources.11 Configuring the Clock Sources A. Related Tasks 5.OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Commissioning Guide (U2000) A Parameters Description Parameter External Clock Source Mode Value Range 2 Mbit/s 2 MHz Default Value 2Mbit/s Description l This parameter indicates the type of the external clock source signal. the external clock signal is a 2 Mbit/s signal. In normal cases. Navigation Path 1.. Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > Orderwire from the Function Tree. Synchronous Status Byte SA4 to SA8 SA4 l This parameter is valid only when External Clock Source Mode is set to 2Mbit/s. l This parameter needs to be set only when the SSM or extended SSM is enabled. l This parameter is set according to the external clock signal.15 Parameter Description: Orderwire_General This topic describes the parameters that are used for general orderwire features. Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. 1 indicates the highest clock source priority. l This parameter indicates which bit of the TS0 in odd frames of the external clock signal is used to transmit the SSM. 205 . Ltd. the external clock sources use the SA4 to transmit the SSM. In normal cases.1.

it is recommended that you set this parameter to nine seconds. l If less than 30 nodes exist in the orderwire subnet. it is recommended that you set this parameter to five seconds. Dialling Mode Pulse Dual-Tone Frequency Conference Call Dual-Tone Frequency This parameter indicates the dialling mode of the orderwire phone. When an OptiX RTN 950 receives the call. In this case. the orderwire phones of all the NEs on the orderwire subnet ring. the orderwire point-to-multipoint group call changes to a point-to-point call between two NEs.. 206 .OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Commissioning Guide (U2000) A Parameters Description 2. Ltd. it automatically removes the communication connection. Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. l The call waiting time should be set to the same for all the NEs. Click the General tab. l When an OptiX RTN 950 dials the telephone number 888. l The telephone number of the orderwire conference call should be the same for all the nodes on the same subnet. If more than 30 nodes exist in the orderwire subnet. l The telephone number of the orderwire conference call must have the same length as the telephone number of the orderwire phone (phone 1) at the local site. the orderwire phones on the other NEs do not ring. Parameters Parameter Call Waiting Time (s) Value Range 1 to 9 Default Value 9 Description l This parameter indicates the waiting time after the local station dials the number. 888 l This parameter indicates the telephone number of the network-wide orderwire conference call. If the calling station does not receive the response message from the called station within the call waiting time.

Ltd. 2. Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. Navigation Path 1.13 Configuring the Orderwire 5.. It is recommended that you set the phone number to a three-digit number.16 Parameter Description: Orderwire_Advanced This topic describes the parameters that are used for advanced orderwire features. l The orderwire phone number cannot be set to the group call number 888 and cannot start with 888. Related Tasks 4. This parameter indicates the selected port for the orderwire phone.2. It is recommended that the phone numbers are allocated from 101 for the NEs in a sequential order according to the NE IDs.12 Configuring Orderwire A. 207 .1. l The orderwire phone number of each NE should be unique. An addressing call refers to a point-to-point call. Click the Advanced tab. Available Orderwire Port Selected Orderwire Port - - This parameter indicates the available port for the orderwire phone. Choose Configuration > Orderwire from the Function Tree.OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Commissioning Guide (U2000) A Parameters Description Parameter Phone 1 Value Range 100 to 99999999 Default Value 101 Description l This parameter specifies the orderwire phone number of the local station. Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. l The length of the orderwire phone number of each NE should be the same.

the radio link always uses a customized overhead byte to transmit the orderwire signals.OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Commissioning Guide (U2000) A Parameters Description Parameters for Bytes Occupied by Orderwire Phones Parameter Orderwire Occupied Bytes Value Range E1 E2 Default Value E1 Description l This parameter specifies the overhead byte that is used to transmit the orderwire signals. 208 . Hence.12 Configuring Orderwire Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co.2.. Ltd.1. l Regardless the parameter value. Related Tasks 4. this parameter should be set according to the occupied SDH overhead bytes in the ordinary SDH.13 Configuring the Orderwire 5.

B.OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Commissioning Guide (U2000) B Glossary B Terms are listed in an alphabetical order.6 U-Z This section provides the terms starting with letters U to Z. 209 . B. B. B.3 F-J This section provides the terms starting with letters F to J. B. Ltd.2 A-E This section provides the terms starting with letters A to E. Glossary Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. B.4 K-O This section provides the terms starting with letters K to O.1 0-9 This section provides the terms starting with numbers.5 P-T This section provides the terms starting with letters P to T..

together with their access rights.1 0-9 This section provides the terms starting with numbers.OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Commissioning Guide (U2000) B Glossary B. the equipment adopts a highefficiency modulation scheme to improve the transmission efficiency and the spectrum utilization of the system. A ABR ACAP access control list ACL adaptive modulation See available bit rate See adjacent channel alternate polarization A list of entities.) B. the equipment adopts the low-efficiency modulation scheme to improve the anti-interference capability of the link that carries high-priority services. and/ or dropped from (extracted) the STM-N signal as it passed through the ADM. It consists of an information payload (the higher order VC) and an AU pointer which indicates the offset of the payload frame start relative to the multiplex section frame start.2 A-E This section provides the terms starting with letters A to E. When the channel quality is degraded. The constituent signals are added to (inserted). The address resolution is a process in which the host converts the target IP address into a target MAC address before transmitting a frame. See access control list A technology that is used to automatically adjust the modulation scheme according to the channel quality. See add/drop multiplexer The information structure which provides adaptation between the higher order path layer and the multiplex section layer. 1U The standard electronics industries association (EIA) rack unit (44 mm/1. An aggregation can be a concrete or conceptual set of whole-part relationships among objects.75 in.. See assured forwarding A collection of objects that makes a whole. It allows hosts and routers to determine the link layer addresses through ARP requests and ARP responses. which uses two adjacent channels (a horizontal polarization wave and a vertical polarization wave) to transmit two signals. Ltd. 210 ADC add/drop multiplexer Address Resolution Protocol adjacent channel alternate polarization ADM administrative unit AF aggregation Issue 01 (2011-10-30) . Address Resolution Protocol (ARP) is an Internet Protocol used to map IP addresses to MAC addresses. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. When the channel quality is favorable. A channel configuration method. which are authorized to have access to a resource. The basic function of the ARP is to query the MAC address of the target equipment through its IP address. See analog to digital converter Network elements that provide access to all or some subset of the constituent signals contained within an STM-N signal.

Based on the filter state of the alarm. AM analog to digital converter APS ARP assured forwarding Asynchronous Transfer Mode ATM ATM PVC ATPC attenuator AU automatic protection switching automatic transmit power control available bit rate Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. the alarm is not displayed or stored on the EMS. It does not provide any guarantee in terms of cell loss or delay. AF assures quality in forwarding. See administrative unit Capability of a transmission system to detect a failure on a working facility and to switch to a standby facility to recover the traffic.OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Commissioning Guide (U2000) B Glossary AIS See alarm indication signal alarm automatic report When an alarm is generated on the device side. which may be the networkwide equipment. Statistical and deterministic values may also be used to qualify the transfer mode. an alarm panel prompts and the user can view the details of the alarm. For traffic that exceeds the bandwidth limit. however. See adaptive modulation An electronic circuit that converts continuous signals to discrete digital numbers. It is associated with multiple transport layers. the EMS determines whether to display or save the alarm information. AF degrades the service class and continues to forward the traffic instead of discarding the packets. A transfer mode in which the information is organized into cells. See automatic protection switching See Address Resolution Protocol One of the four per-hop behaviors (PHB) defined by the Diff-Serv workgroup of IETF. The alarm. a specific NE. If the filter state of an alarm is set to Filter. Then. a specific board and even a specific function module of a specific board. A protocol for the transmission of a variety of digital signals using uniform 53 byte cells. ABR only provides possible forwarding service and applies to the connections that does not require the real-time quality. Ltd. is still monitored by the NE. The reverse operation is performed by a digital-to-analog converter (DAC). See Asynchronous Transfer Mode ATM permanent virtual circuit See automatic transmit power control A device used to increase the attenuation of an Optical Fiber Link. 211 . the alarm is reported to the Network Management System (NMS). An NE reports the detected alarm to the element management system (EMS). For traffic within the bandwidth limit. alarm cascading Alarm Filtering The shunt-wound output of the alarm signals of several subracks or cabinets. It is suitable for certain key data services that require assured bandwidth and short delay. Generally used to ensure that the signal at the receive end is not too strong. alarm indication signal A code sent downstream in a digital network as an indication that an upstream failure has been detected and alarmed. A method of adjusting the transmit power based on fading of the transmit signal detected at the receiver A kind of service categories defined by the ATM forum.. alarm suppression A function used not to monitor alarms for a specific object. it is asynchronous in the sense that the recurrence of cells depends on the required or instantaneous bit rate.

The BIOS provides hardware setting and control functions for the computer. jitter. packet loss ratio. It provides the following functions: radio resource management..7 mm wide. A range of transmission frequencies that a transmission line or channel can carry in a network. power-on self test (POST) programs. In fact. bootstraps. the second bit provides even parity over the second bit of all X-bit sequences within the specified portion. base station management. All diagrams share the bandwidth of the network and routers. The greater the bandwidth. with one hook side (made of transparent polypropylene material) and one mat side (made of black nylon material). It allows transmission of traffic and signaling across the air interface. See basic input/output system See bit interleaved parity An incompatibility between a bit in a transmitted digital signal and the corresponding bit in the received digital signal. A logical entity that connects the BTS with the MSC in a GSM network.OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Commissioning Guide (U2000) B Glossary B backward defect indication bandwidth When detecting a defect. handover control. radio equipment. The BTS includes the baseband processing. and the antenna. and traffic measurement. etc. the diagrams are forwarded following the sequence of the time they reach. it is the difference between the highest and lowest frequencies the transmission line or channel. It interworks with the BTS through the Abis interface. With even parity an X-bit code is generated by the transmitting equipment over a specified portion of the signal in such a manner that the first bit of the code provides even parity over the first bit of all X-bit sequences in the covered portion of the signal. It contains basic input/output control programs. Even parity is generated by setting the BIP-X bits so that there is an even number of 1s in each monitored partition of the signal. BER is an important index used to measure the communications quality of a network. the MSC through the A interface. and high reliability. BE service does not ensure any improvement in delay time. the sink node of an LSP uses backward defect indication (BDI) to inform the upstream end of the LSP of a downstream defect along the return path. One BSC controls and manages one or more BTSs in an actual network. base station controller base transceiver station A Base Transceiver Station terminates the radio interface. power control. Ratio of received bits that contain errors. See backward defect indication See best effort See bit error rate A traditional IP packet transport service. A monitored partition comprises all bits which are in the same bit position within the X-bit sequences in the covered portion of the signal. the faster the data transfer rate. 212 . Ltd. basic input/output system BDI BE BER best effort A firmware stored in the computer mainboard. The covered portion includes the BIP-X. and system setting information. The binding strap is 12. The amount of resource that a diagram can use depends of the time it reaches. In this service. See bridge protocol data unit binding strap BIOS BIP bit error bit error rate bit interleaved parity BPDU Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. A method of error monitoring.

The CPU has the ability to fetch. See base station controller See base transceiver station A storage area used for handling data in transit. Mb/s (106 bit/s). CES CF CGMP channel See circuit emulation service See compact flash See Cisco Group Management Protocol A telecommunication path of a specific capacity and/or at a specific speed between two or more locations in a network. the bus. Buffers are used in inter-networking to compensate for differences in processing speed between network devices. and execute instructions and to transfer information to and from other resources over the computer's main data-transfer path. kb/s (103 bit/s). b/s (100 bit/s). priorities and costs and ensure that the data ends up where it was intended to go. Bursts of data can be stored in buffers until they can be handled by slower processing devices. addresses. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. fiber or a combination of the three. For example. or blocked. radio (microwave). state. broadcast BSC BTS buffer C cable tie cable tray cable trough CAR CBR CBS CC CCC CCDP CCM CE The tape used to bind the cables. N/A N/A See committed access rate See constant bit rate See committed burst size See connectivity check See circuit cross connect See co-channel dual polarization See continuity check message See customer edge central processing unit The computational and control unit of a computer. Ltd. The CPU is the device that interprets and executes instructions.. buffers are created to hold some amount of data from each of the files that will be read or written. BPDU messages are exchanged across bridges to detect loops in a network topology. The broadcast range is determined by the broadcast address. In a program. In a streaming media application. The amount of information transmitted per second in a channel is the information transmission speed. The loops are then removed by shutting down selected bridges interfaces and placing redundant switch ports in a backup.OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Commissioning Guide (U2000) B Glossary bridge protocol data unit The data messages that are exchanged across the switches within an extended LAN that uses a spanning tree protocol (STP) topology. The channel can be established through wire. expressed in bits per second. 213 Issue 01 (2011-10-30) . decode. Gb/s (109 bit/s). and Tb/s (1012 bit/s). the program uses buffers to store an advance supply of audio or video data to compensate for momentary delays. A means of delivering information to all members in a network. BPDU packets contain information on ports.

the interface module re-assigns the data in these ATM cells to E1/T1 timeslots. The CES technology guarantees that the data in E1/T1 timeslots can be recovered to the original sequence at the reception end. at which the token is transferred to the leaky bucket. A channel configuration method. A function with which the E1/T1 data can be transmitted through ATM networks. CompactFlash typically uses flash memory in a standardized enclosure. the interface module packs timeslot data into ATM cells. measured in bit/s. committed burst size. N/A See common and internal spanning tree A switch of the highest priority is elected as the root in an MSTP network. A process that combines multiple virtual containers. CAR is a configurable method by which incoming and outgoing packets can be classified into QoS (Quality of Service) groups. At the reception end. it is the rate. The detection is achieved by each MEP transmitting a Continuity Check Message (CCM) periodically. the maximum burst IP packet size when the information is transferred at the committed information rate. A signal transmission technology that multiplexes widely-spaced optical channels into the same fiber. A traffic control method that uses a set of rate limits to be applied to a router interface.. that is. The combined capacities can be used a single capacity. Cisco Group Management Protocol CIST CIST root clock tracing co-channel dual polarization coarse wavelength division multiplexing colored packet committed access rate committed burst size committed information The rate at which a frame relay network agrees to transfer information in normal rate conditions. The concatenation also keeps the integrity of bit sequence. The Co-Channel Dual Polarization is twice the transmission capacity of the single polarization. It is recommended that this parameter should be not less than the maximum length of the IP packet that might be forwarded. calculated by MSTP to ensure that all LANs in the bridged local area network are simply and fully connected. concatenation connectivity check Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. Compact flash (CF) was originally developed as a type of data storage device used in portable electronic devices. CWDM widely spaces wavelengths at a spacing of several nm. and by which the input or output transmission rate can be defined. These ATM cells are sent to the reception end through the ATM network. Ethernet CFM can detect the connectivity between MEPs. The method to keep the time on each node being synchronized with a clock source in a network.OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Commissioning Guide (U2000) B Glossary CIR circuit cross connect circuit emulation service See committed information rate An implementation of MPLS L2VPN through the static configuration of labels. At the transmission end. A packet whose priority is determined by defined colors. common and internal spanning tree compact flash The single spanning tree calculated by STP and RSTP together with the logical continuation of that connectivity by using MST Bridges and regions. Ltd. 214 . A parameter used to define the capacity of token bucket C. This parameter must be larger than 0. Namely. For storage. which uses a horizontal polarization wave and a vertical polarization wave to transmit two signals. CWDM does not support optical amplifiers and is applied in a short-distance chain network.

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Commissioning Guide (U2000)

B Glossary

constant bit rate

A kind of service categories defined by the ATM forum. CBR transfers cells based on the constant bandwidth. It is applicable to service connections that depend on precise clocking to ensure undistorted transmission. CCM is used to detect the link status. Used to protect optical fibers. See central processing unit See cyclic redundancy check A technology used in the case of the Co-Channel Dual Polarization (CCDP) to eliminate the cross-connect interference between two polarization waves in the CCDP. A part of BGP/MPLS IP VPN model. It provides interfaces for direct connection to the Service Provider (SP) network. A CE can be a router, switch, or host. See coarse wavelength division multiplexing A procedure used in checking for errors in data transmission. CRC error checking uses a complex calculation to generate a number based on the data transmitted. The sending device performs the calculation before transmission and includes it in the packet that it sends to the receiving device. The receiving device repeats the same calculation after transmission. If both devices obtain the same result, it is assumed that the transmission was error free. The procedure is known as a redundancy check because each transmission includes not only data but extra (redundant) error-checking values.

continuity check message corrugated pipe CPU CRC cross polarization interference cancellation customer edge CWDM cyclic redundancy check

D
data communication network data communications channel A communication network used in a TMN or between TMNs to support the Data Communication Function (DCF). The data channel that uses the D1-D12 bytes in the overhead of an STM-N signal to transmit information on operation, management, maintenance and provision (OAM&P) between NEs. The DCC channels that are composed of bytes D1-D3 is referred to as the 192 kbit/s DCC-R channel. The other DCC channel that are composed of bytes D4-D12 is referred to as the 576 kbit/s DCC-M channel. A kind of PDU which is used in Connectionless Network Protocol, such as IP datagram, UDP datagram. See direct current See DC-return common (with ground) DC-return common (with ground) See DC-return common (with ground) See DC-return isolate (with ground) A power system, in which the BGND of the DC return conductor is short-circuited with the PGND on the output side of the power supply cabinet and also on the line between the output of the power supply cabinet and the electric equipment. A power system, in which the BGND of the DC return conductor is short-circuited with the PGND on the output side of the power supply cabinet and also on the line between the output of the power supply cabinet and the electric equipment.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 215

Datagram DC DC-C DC-C DC-C DC-I DC-return common (with ground) DC-return common (with ground)

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Commissioning Guide (U2000)

B Glossary

DC-return isolate (with A power system, in which the BGND of the DC return conductor is short-circuited with ground) the PGND on the output side of the power supply cabinet and is isolated from the PGND on the line between the output of the power supply cabinet and the electric equipment. DCC DCN DDF DDN DE differentiated services See data communications channel See data communication network See digital distribution frame See digital data network See discard eligible A service architecture that provides the end-to-end QoS function. It consists of a series of functional units implemented at the network nodes, including a small group of perhop forwarding behaviors, packet classification functions, and traffic conditioning functions such as metering, marking, shaping and policing. A marker in the header of each IP packet that prompts network routers to apply differentiated grades of service to various packet streams. It is specified by the DiffServ policy proposed by the IETF (Internet Engineering Task Force). This allows Internet and other IP-based network service providers to offer different levels of service to customers. See differentiated services A high-quality data transport tunnel that combines the digital channel (such as fiber channel, digital microwave channel, or satellite channel) and the cross multiplex technology. A type of equipment used between the transmission equipment and the exchange with transmission rate of 2 to 155 Mbit/s to provide the functions such as cables connection, cable patching, and test of loops that transmitting digital signals. A digital modulation controls the changes in amplitude, phase, and frequency of the carrier based on the changes in the baseband digital signal. In this manner, the information can be transmitted by the carrier. Electrical current whose direction of flow does not reverse. The current may stop or change amplitude, but it always flows in the same direction. A bit in the frame relay header. It indicates the priority of a packet. If a node supports the FR QoS, the rate of the accessed FR packets is controlled. When the packet traffic exceeds the specified traffic, the DE value of the redundant packets is set to 1. In the case of network congestion, the packets with DE value as 1 are discarded at the node. An Internet gateway protocol mainly based on the RIP. The protocol implements a typical dense mode IP multicast solution. The DVMRP protocol uses IGMP to exchange routing datagrams with its neighbors. A DS node that connects one DS domain to a node either in another DS domain or in a domain that is not DS-capable. In the DifferServ mechanism, the DS domain is a domain consisting of a group of network nodes that share the same service provisioning policy and same PHB. It provides point-to-point QoS guarantees for services transmitted over this domain. A DS node located at the center of a DS domain. It is a non-DS boundary node. A DS-compliant node, which is subdivided into DS boundary node and ID interior node. See differentiated services code point

differentiated services code point

DiffServ digital data network

digital distribution frame digital modulation

direct current discard eligible

Distance Vector Multicast Routing Protocol DS boundary node DS domain

DS interior node DS node DSCP

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

216

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Commissioning Guide (U2000)

B Glossary

dual-polarized antenna An antenna intended to radiate or receive simultaneously two independent radio waves orthogonally polarized. DVMRP See Distance Vector Multicast Routing Protocol

E
E-Aggr E-LAN E-Line E-Tree EBS ECC EF electromagnetic compatibility See Ethernet aggregation See Ethernet LAN See Ethernet line See Ethernet-tree See excess burst size See embedded control channel See expedited forwarding Electromagnetic compatibility is the condition which prevails when telecommunications equipment is performing its individually designed function in a common electromagnetic environment without causing or suffering unacceptable degradation due to unintentional electromagnetic interference to or from other equipment in the same environment. Any electromagnetic disturbance that interrupts, obstructs, or otherwise degrades or limits the effective performance of electronics/electrical equipment. The sudden and momentary electric current that flows between two objects at different electrical potentials caused by direct contact or induced by an electrostatic field. A logical channel that uses a data communications channel (DCC) as its physical layer, to enable transmission of operation, administration, and maintenance (OAM) information between NEs. See electromagnetic compatibility See electromagnetic interference A mark on a cable, a subrack, or a cabinet for identification. See Ethernet private line See Ethernet private LAN service A method of avoiding selective fading of frequencies. Equalization can compensate for the changes of amplitude frequency caused by frequency selective fading. See Ethernet ring protection switching See electrostatic discharge Electrostatic discharge jack. A hole in the cabinet or shelf, which connect the shelf or cabinet to the insertion of ESD wrist strap. A technology complemented in LAN. It adopts Carrier Sense Multiple Access/Collision Detection. The speed of an Ethernet interface can be 10 Mbit/s, 100 Mbit/s, 1000 Mbit/ s or 10000 Mbit/s. The Ethernet network features high reliability and easy maintaining. A technology complemented in LAN. It adopts Carrier Sense Multiple Access/Collision Detection. The speed of an Ethernet interface can be 10 Mbit/s, 100 Mbit/s, 1000 Mbit/ s or 10000 Mbit/s. The Ethernet network features high reliability and easy maintaining.

electromagnetic interference electrostatic discharge embedded control channel EMC EMI Engineering label EPL EPLAN equalization ERPS ESD ESD jack Ethernet

Ethernet

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

217

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Commissioning Guide (U2000)

B Glossary

Ethernet aggregation Ethernet LAN Ethernet line Ethernet private LAN service Ethernet private line Ethernet ring protection switching Ethernet virtual private LAN service Ethernet virtual private line Ethernet-tree ETS ETSI European Telecommunications Standards Institute EVPL EVPLAN excess burst size

A type of Ethernet service that is based on a multipoint-to-point EVC (Ethernet virtual connection). A type of Ethernet service that is based on a multipoint-to-multipoint EVC (Ethernet virtual connection). A type of Ethernet service that is based on a point-to-point EVC (Ethernet virtual connection). An Ethernet service type, which carries Ethernet characteristic information over a dedicated bridge, point-to-multipoint connections, provided by SDH, PDH, ATM, or MPLS server layer networks. A type of Ethernet service that is provided with dedicated bandwidth and point-to-point connections on an SDH, PDH, ATM, or MPLS server layer network. protection switching mechanisms for ETH layer Ethernet ring topologies. An Ethernet service type, which carries Ethernet characteristic information over a shared bridge, point-to-multipoint connections, provided by SDH, PDH, ATM, or MPLS server layer networks. An Ethernet service type, which carries Ethernet characteristic information over shared bandwidth, point-to-point connections, provided by SDH, PDH, ATM, or MPLS server layer networks. An Ethernet service type that is based on a Point-to-multipoint Ethernet Virtual Connection. European Telecommunication Standards See European Telecommunications Standards Institute A standards-setting body in Europe. Also the standards body responsible for GSM.

See Ethernet virtual private line See Ethernet virtual private LAN service A parameter related to traffic. In the single rate three color marker (srTCM) mode, the traffic control is achieved by the token buckets C and E. Excess burst size is a parameter used to define the capacity of token bucket E, that is, the maximum burst IP packet size when the information is transferred at the committed information rate. This parameter must be larger than 0. It is recommended that this parameter should be not less than the maximum length of the IP packet that might be forwarded. An operation to check if the protection switching protocol functions normally. The protection switching is not really performed. Connecting a storage system to more disk enclosures through connection cables, expanding the capacity of the storage system. The highest order QoS in the Diff-Serv network. EF PHB is suitable for services that demand low packet loss ratio, short delay, and broad bandwidth. In all the cases, EF traffic can guarantee a transmission rate equal to or faster than the set rate. The DSCP value of EF PHB is "101110".

Exercise Switching expansion expedited forwarding

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

218

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Commissioning Guide (U2000)

B Glossary

B.3 F-J
This section provides the terms starting with letters F to J.

F
failure If the fault persists long enough to consider the ability of an item with a required function to be terminated. The item may be considered as having failed; a fault has now been detected. Any network that supports transmission rate of 100Mbits/s. The Fast Ethernet is 10 times faster than 10BaseT, and inherits frame format, MAC addressing scheme, MTU, and so on. Fast Ethernet is extended from the IEEE802.3 standard, and it uses the following three types of transmission media: 100BASE-T4 (4 pairs of phone twisted-pair cables), 100BASE-TX (2 pairs of data twisted-pair cables), and 100BASE-FX (2-core optical fibers). The link pulse that is used to encode information during automatic negotiation. See frequency diversity See forward defect indication See fast Ethernet See forward error correction fast failure detection A kind of fiber used for connections between the subrack and the ODF, and for connections between subracks or inside a subrack. A type of semi-customized circuit used in the Application Specific Integrated Circuit (ASIC) field. It is developed on the basis of the programmable components, such as the PAL, GAL, and EPLD. It not only remedies the defects of customized circuits, but also overcomes the disadvantage of the original programmable components in terms of the limited number of gate arrays. See First in First out A member of the TCP/IP suite of protocols, used to copy files between two computers on the Internet. Both computers must support their respective FTP roles: one must be an FTP client and the other an FTP server. A stack management mechanism. The first saved data is first read and invoked. For normal traffic signals, switches normal traffic signal to the protection section, unless an equal or higher priority switch command is in effect or SF condition exists on the protection section, by issuing a forced switch request for that traffic signal. Forward defect indication (FDI) is generated and traced forward to the sink node of the LSP by the node that first detects defects. It includes fields to indicate the nature of the defect and its location. Its primary purpose is to suppress alarms being raised at affected higher level client LSPs and (in turn) their client layers. A bit error correction technology that adds the correction information to the payload at the transmit end. Based on the correction information, the bit errors generated during transmission are corrected at the receive end.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 219

fast Ethernet

fast link pulse FD FDI FE FEC FFD fiber patch cord field programmable gate array

FIFO File Transfer Protocol

First in First out Forced switch

forward defect indication

forward error correction

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

See File Transfer Protocol A full-duplex. It also supports the channels in the bandwidth mode. A frame. allows this to happen simultaneously. See field programmable gate array Piece of a larger packet that has been broken down to smaller units. and it does not support coaxial cables or other cables. See gateway network element See Global Positioning System Global Positioning System GNE GPS Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. If Gigabit Ethernet is. It runs at 1000 Mbit/s. Gigabit Ethernet uses full duplex links that are private. The forwarding plane is connection-oriented. A good analogy for a full-duplex system would be a two-lane road with one lane for each direction.OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Commissioning Guide (U2000) B Glossary Forwarding plane FPGA fragment Fragmentation frame Also referred to as the data plane. Ltd. GE is compatible with 10 Mbit/s and 100 Mbit/s Ethernet. generic traffic shaping A traffic control measure that initiatively adjusts the output speed of the traffic. unlike half-duplex. is a string of bytes with a specified length. A diversity scheme that enables two or more microwave frequencies with a certain frequency interval are used to transmit/receive the same signal and selection is then performed between the two signals to ease the impact of fading. a header is a code segment that reflects the distribution (diagram) of the elements prespecified by the sending and receiving parties. causing the length of the links to be sufficient for backbone applications in a building and campus. A header comprises one or a number of bytes with pre-specified values. A global navigation satellite system. In the network structure. deployed to be the private bandwidth system with a bridge (switch) or a router as the center. Gigabit Ethernet uses a private medium. since they allow both callers to speak and be heard at the same time. and can be used in Layer 2 networks such as an ATM network. This is to adapt the traffic to network resources that can be provided by the downstream router to avoid packet discarding and congestion. It provides reliable positioning. Frame length is represented by the sampling circle or the total number of bytes sampled during a circle. frequency diversity FTP full-duplex G gateway network element GE generic framing procedure A network element that is used for communication between the NE application layer and the NM application layer See gigabit Ethernet A framing and encapsulated method which can be applied to any data type. and timing services to worldwide users. however. Process of breaking a packet into smaller units when transmitting over a network medium that cannot support the original size of the packet. it gives full play to the performance and the bandwidth. In other words. starting with a header. and. GFP gigabit Ethernet See generic framing procedure GE adopts the IEEE 802..3z. It has been standardized by ITU-T SG15. navigation. Land-line telephone networks are full-duplex. or sometimes double-duplex system. 220 . allows communication in both directions.

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Commissioning Guide (U2000)

B Glossary

graphical user interface A visual computer environment that represents programs, files, and options with graphical images, such as icons, menus, and dialog boxes, on the screen. GTS GUI guide rail See generic traffic shaping See graphical user interface Components to guide, position, and support plug-in boards.

H
HA half-duplex See high availability A transmitting mode in which a half-duplex system provides for communication in both directions, but only one direction at a time (not simultaneously). Typically, once a party begins receiving a signal, it must wait for the transmitter to stop transmitting, before replying. See high level data link control A type of QoS that can control the traffic of users, and perform the scheduling according to the priority of user services. HQoS has a perfect traffic statistics function, and the administrator can monitor the usage of bandwidth of each service. Hence, the bandwidth can be allocated reasonably through traffic analysis. Typically, a scheme in which two modules operate in active/standby mode to achieve high availability. When the active module fails, the standby module automatically takes over the system functions of the active module. The HDLC protocol is a general purpose protocol which operates at the data link layer of the OSI reference model. Each piece of data is encapsulated in an HDLC frame by adding a trailer and a header. A modulating-demodulating algorithm put forward in 3GPP R5 to meet the requirement for asymmetric uplink and downlink transmission of data services. It enables the maximum downlink data service rate to reach 14.4 Mbit/s without changing the WCDMA network topology. In an SDH network, the higher order path layers provide a server network from the lower order path layers. The priority of the tunnel with respect to holding resources, ranging from 0 (indicates the highest priority) to 7. It is used to determine whether the resources occupied by the tunnel can be preempted by other tunnels. A network connection between two distant nodes. For Internet operation a hop represents a small step on the route from one main computer to another. A mechanism of ensuring device running security. The environment variables and storage information of each running device are synchronized to the standby device. When the faults occur on the running device, the standby device can take over the services in the faulty device in automatic or manual way to ensure the normal running of the entire system. See higher order path See hierarchical quality of service See hot standby See High Speed Downlink Packet Access
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 221

HDLC hierarchical quality of service

high availability

high level data link control High Speed Downlink Packet Access

higher order path Hold priority

hop hot standby

HP HQoS HSB HSDPA
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Commissioning Guide (U2000)

B Glossary

HSM HTB hybrid radio

hitless switch mode high tributary bus The hybrid transmission of Native E1 and Native Ethernet signals. Hybrid radio supports the AM function.

I
ICMP IDU IEC IEEE IETF IF IGMP IGMP snooping See Internet Control Message Protocol See indoor unit See International Electrotechnical Commission See Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers See Internet Engineering Task Force See intermediate frequency See Internet Group Management Protocol A multicast constraint mechanism running on a layer 2 device. This protocol manages and controls the multicast group by listening to and analyze the Internet Group Management Protocol (IGMP) packet between hosts and layer 3 devices. In this manner, the spread of the multicast data on layer 2 network can be prevented efficiently. See inverse multiplexing over ATM The indoor unit of the split-structured radio equipment. It implements accessing, multiplexing/demultiplexing, and IF processing for services. A method of looping the signals from the cross-connect unit back to the cross-connect unit. A society of engineering and electronics professionals based in the United States but boasting membership from numerous other countries. The IEEE focuses on electrical, electronics, computer engineering, and science-related matters.

IMA indoor unit Inloop Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers

intermediate frequency The transitional frequency between the frequencies of a modulated signal and an RF signal. Intermediate System The basic unit in the IS-IS protocol used to transmit routing information and generate routes.

Intermediate System to A protocol used by network devices (routers) to determine the best way to forward Intermediate System datagrams or packets through a packet-based network, a process called routing. routing protocol internal spanning tree International Electrotechnical Commission International Organization for Standardization A segment of CIST in a certain MST region. An IST is a special MSTI whose ID is 0. The International Electrotechnical Commission (IEC) is an international and nongovernmental standards organization dealing with electrical and electronic standards. An international association that works to establish global standards for communications and information exchange. Primary among its accomplishments is the widely accepted ISO/OSI reference model, which defines standards for the interaction of computers connected by communications networks.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

222

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Commissioning Guide (U2000)

B Glossary

International Telecommunication UnionTelecommunication Standardization Sector Internet Control Message Protocol

An international body that develops worldwide standards for telecommunications technologies. These standards are grouped together in series which are prefixed with a letter indicating the general subject and a number specifying the particular standard. For example, X.25 comes from the "X" series which deals with data networks and open system communications and number "25" deals with packet switched networks. A network-layer (ISO/OSI level 3) Internet protocol that provides error correction and other information relevant to IP packet processing. For example, it can let the IP software on one machine inform another machine about an unreachable destination. See also communications protocol, IP, ISO/OSI reference model, packet (definition 1). A worldwide organization of individuals interested in networking and the Internet. Managed by the Internet Engineering Steering Group (IESG), the IETF is charged with studying technical problems facing the Internet and proposing solutions to the Internet Architecture Board (IAB). The work of the IETF is carried out by various working groups that concentrate on specific topics, such as routing and security. The IETF is the publisher of the specifications that led to the TCP/IP protocol standard. The protocol for managing the membership of Internet Protocol multicast groups among the TCP/IP protocols. It is used by IP hosts and adjacent multicast routers to establish and maintain multicast group memberships. The TCP/IP standard protocol that defines the IP packet as the unit of information sent across an internet and provides the basis for connectionless, best-effort packet delivery service. IP includes the ICMP control and error message protocol as an integral part. The entire protocol suite is often referred to as TCP/IP because TCP and IP are the two fundamental protocols. IP is standardized in RFC 791. A update version of IPv4. It is also called IP Next Generation (IPng). The specifications and standardizations provided by it are consistent with the Internet Engineering Task Force (IETF). IPv6 is also called. It is a new version of the Internet Protocol, designed as the successor to IPv4. The difference between IPv6 and IPv4 is that an IPv4 address has 32 bits while an IPv6 address has 128 bits. A update version of IPv4. It is also called IP Next Generation (IPng). The specifications and standardizations provided by it are consistent with the Internet Engineering Task Force (IETF). IPv6 is also called. It is a new version of the Internet Protocol, designed as the successor to IPv4. The difference between IPv6 and IPv4 is that an IPv4 address has 32 bits while an IPv6 address has 128 bits. The ATM inverse multiplexing technique involves inverse multiplexing and demultiplexing of ATM cells in a cyclical fashion among links grouped to form a higher bandwidth logical link whose rate is approximately the sum of the link rates. This is referred to as an IMA group. See Internet Protocol See Internet protocol version 6 See Internet protocol version 6 See Intermediate System to Intermediate System routing protocol See International Organization for Standardization See internal spanning tree See International Telecommunication Union-Telecommunication Standardization Sector

Internet Engineering Task Force

Internet Group Management Protocol Internet Protocol

Internet protocol version 6

Internet protocol version 6

inverse multiplexing over ATM

IP IPV6 IPv6 IS-IS ISO IST ITU-T

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

223

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Commissioning Guide (U2000)

B Glossary

J
Jitter Short waveform variations caused by vibration, voltage fluctuations, and control system instability.

B.4 K-O
This section provides the terms starting with letters K to O.

L
L2VPN label switched path See Layer 2 virtual private network A sequence of hops (R0...Rn) in which a packet travels from R0 to Rn through label switching mechanisms. A label-switched path can be chosen dynamically, based on normal routing mechanisms, or through configuration. Basic element of MPLS network. All LSRs support the MPLS protocol. The LSR is composed of two parts: control unit and forwarding unit. The former is responsible for allocating the label, selecting the route, creating the label forwarding table, creating and removing the label switch path; the latter forwards the labels according to groups received in the label forwarding table. See Link Aggregation Control Protocol See link aggregation group See local area network See local area network link access protocol-SDH A component that generates directional optical waves of narrow wavelengths. The laser light has better coherence than ordinary light. The fiber system takes the semi-conductor laser as the light source. A data forwarding method. In LAN, a network bridge or 802.3 Ethernet switch transmits and distributes packet data based on the MAC address. Since the MAC address is the second layer of the OSI model, this data forwarding method is called layer 2 switch.

label switching router

LACP LAG LAN LAN LAPS Laser

layer 2 switch

Layer 2 virtual private A virtual private network achieved by Layer 2 switching technologies in the packet network switched (IP/MPLS) network. LB LCAS LCT line rate line rate forwarding Link Aggregation Control Protocol See loopback See link capacity adjustment scheme local craft terminal The maximum packet forwarding capacity on a cable. The value of line rate equals the maximum transmission rate capable on a given type of media. The line rate equals the maximum transmission rate capable on a given type of media. A method of bundling a group of physical interfaces together as a logical interface to increase bandwidth and reliability. For related protocols and standards, refer to IEEE 802.3ad.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

224

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Commissioning Guide (U2000)

B Glossary

link aggregation group An aggregation that allows one or more links to be aggregated together to form a link aggregation group so that a MAC client can treat the link aggregation group as if it were a single link. link capacity adjustment scheme LCAS in the virtual concatenation source and sink adaptation functions provides a control mechanism to hitlessly increase or decrease the capacity of a link to meet the bandwidth needs of the application. It also provides a means of removing member links that have experienced failure. The LCAS assumes that in cases of capacity initiation, increases or decreases, the construction or destruction of the end-to-end path is the responsibility of the Network and Element Management Systems. Protection provided by the bypass tunnel for the link on the working tunnel. The link is a downstream link adjacent to the PLR. When the PLR fails to provide node protection, the link protection should be provided. linear multiplex section protection A network formed by the computers and workstations within the coverage of a few square kilometers or within a single building. It features high speed and low error rate. Ethernet, FDDI, and Token Ring are three technologies used to implement a LAN. Current LANs are generally based on switched Ethernet or Wi-Fi technology and running at 1,000 Mbit/ s (that is, 1 Gbit/s). A network formed by the computers and workstations within the coverage of a few square kilometers or within a single building. It features high speed and low error rate. Ethernet, FDDI, and Token Ring are three technologies used to implement a LAN. Current LANs are generally based on switched Ethernet or Wi-Fi technology and running at 1,000 Mbit/ s (that is, 1 Gbit/s). When the switching condition is satisfied, this function disables the service from being switched from the working channel to the protection channel. When the service has been switched, the function enables the service to be restored from the protection channel to the working channel. See Loss Of Frame loss of multiframe A troubleshooting technique that returns a transmitted signal to its source so that the signal or message can be analyzed for errors. See loss of pointer See Loss Of Signal A condition at the receiver or a maintenance signal transmitted in the PHY overhead indicating that the receiving equipment has lost frame delineation. This is used to monitor the performance of the PHY layer. Loss of Pointer: A condition at the receiver or a maintenance signal transmitted in the PHY overhead indicating that the receiving equipment has lost the pointer to the start of cell in the payload. This is used to monitor the performance of the PHY layer. Loss of signal (LOS) indicates that there are no transitions occurring in the received signal. lower order path link-state pass through See label switched path

Link Protection

LMSP local area network

local area network

Locked switching

LOF LOM loopback LOP LOS Loss Of Frame

loss of pointer

Loss Of Signal LP LPT LSP

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

225

represents the smallest packet size (the one that all networks can transmit without breaking up the packet) among the networks involved. It comprises a collection of objects in a (virtual) database used to manage entities (such as routers and switches) in a network. associated with a specific DSAP of a Service Instance.25 networks. for example. It is a measure of the reliability of the system.914 bytes on 16 Mbps Token Ring. the communication status as well as the basic network operation status. A type of database used for managing the devices in a communications network. The network or the part of the network for which connectivity is managed by CFM. When packets are transmitted across networks. preferably all of it or as much as possible. by issuing a manual switch request for that normal traffic signal. MTU size varies. which can generate and receive CFM frames and track any responses. That portion of a Service Instance. 1500 bytes on Ethernet. The average time that a device will take to recover from a failure. Maintenance Point (MP) is one of either a MEP or a MIP. The devices in an MD are managed by a single ISP. Switches normal traffic signal to the protection section. Ltd. The default client interface of the NMS. The topology clearly shows the structure of the network. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. or PMTU. maintenance association maintenance association end point maintenance domain maintenance point management information base manual switch maximum transmission The largest packet of data that can be transmitted on a network. MBS MCF MD MDI Mean Time Between Failures Mean Time To Repair Issue 01 (2011-10-30) maximum burst size See message communication function See maintenance domain See medium dependent interface The average time between consecutive failures of a piece of equipment. a basic component of the humanmachine interactive interface.. It is also a full mesh of Maintenance Entities. the alarms of different NEs. Responsibility for determining the size of the MTU lies with the link layer of the network. unit depending on the network—576 bytes on X. It is an end point of a single Maintenance Association. the path MTU. and terminates a separate Maintenance Entity for each of the other MEPs in the same Maintenance Association. All topology management functions are accessed here. subnets in the network. A MEP is an actively managed CFM Entity. 226 .OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Commissioning Guide (U2000) B Glossary LSR See label switching router M MA MAC MAC MADM main topology See maintenance association See media access control See media access control multiple add/drop multiplexer A interface that displays the connection relationships of NEs on the NMS (screen display). unless a failure condition exists on other sections (including the protection section) or an equal or higher priority switch command is in effect. the connectivity of which is maintained by CFM. and 17.

and then the data and the control information are transmitted in a specified format to the physical layer. A protocol at the media access control sublayer. and provides a set of fault detection tools and fault correct mechanisms for MPLS networks. the carrier is able to provide Layer 2 VPNs of different media types. The protocol is at the lower part of the data link layer in the OSI model and is mainly responsible for controlling and connecting the physical media at the physical layer. The MPLS OAM provides continuity check for a single LSP. When transmitting data. the MAC protocol checks whether the information is correct and whether the data is transmitted correctly.OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Commissioning Guide (U2000) B Glossary media access control A protocol at the media access control sublayer. VLAN. the control information is removed from the data and then the data is transmitted to the LLC layer. The protocol is at the lower part of the data link layer in the OSI model and is mainly responsible for controlling and connecting the physical media at the physical layer. Ltd. In this case. In this way. The electrical and mechanical interface between the equipment and the media transmission. the MAC protocol checks whether to be able to transmit data. the MAC protocol checks whether the information is correct and whether the data is transmitted correctly. the impact of a fault can be lowered to the minimum. If the information is correct and the data is transmitted correctly. It is used to fix network elements or components. the MAC protocol checks whether to be able to transmit data.. and then the data and the control information are transmitted in a specified format to the physical layer. See multiprotocol label switching traffic engineering media access control medium dependent interface MEP MEP message communication function MIB MIP mounting ear MP MPID MPLS MPLS L2VPN MPLS OAM MPLS TE Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. FR. When transmitting data. The MPLS OAM and relevant protection switching components implement the detection function for the CRLSP forwarding plane. See maintenance association end point maintenance end point The MCF is composed of a protocol stack that allows exchange of management information with their prs. When receiving data. See management information base maintenance intermediate point A piece of angle plate with holes in it on a rack. such as ATM. When receiving data. and PPP. certain control information is added to the data. on a uniform MPLS network. 227 . the control information is removed from the data and then the data is transmitted to the LLC layer. Ethernet. If the information is correct and the data is transmitted correctly. certain control information is added to the data. If the data can be transmitted. and perform the protection switching in 50 ms after a fault occurs. See maintenance point maintenance point identification See Multiprotocol Label Switching The MPLS L2VPN provides the Layer 2 VPN service based on an MPLS network. If the data can be transmitted.

One is the Tunnel ID carried by the SENDER object. manage and maintain the NE.0 to 239.. It improves the cost performance and expandability of networks. Ltd. Multiple spanning tree protocol. N/A MS MSP MSTP MTBF MTTR MTU Multicast Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol multiplex section multiplex section protection Multiprotocol Label Switching multiprotocol label switching traffic engineering N N+1 protection NE NE Explorer A radio link protection system composed of N working channels and one protection channel. the IP address ranges from 224. the user can query. multiple LSP tunnels might be used. from a "working" to a "protection" channel. or when traffic needs to be transported through multiple trails.255. and provides connection-oriented switching for the network layer on the basis of IP routing and control protocols. A technology that uses short tags of fixed length to encapsulate packets in different link layers. the proliferation and endless cycling of packets is avoided in the loop network. See multiplex section See multiplex section protection See Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol See Mean Time Between Failures See Mean Time To Repair See maximum transmission unit A process of transmitting packets of data from one source to many destinations. which is performed to provide capability for switching a signal between and including two multiplex section termination (MST) functions. In the NE Explorer. which is used to manage the telecommunication equipment. the MSTP blocks redundant paths so that the loop network can be trimmed as a tree network. The trail between and including two multiplex section trail termination functions. An LSP tunnel of this kind has two identifiers. 228 . Each multicast address represents a multicast group rather than a host.255.0. The protocol that introduces the mapping between VLANs and multiple spanning trees.255. The MSTP can be used in a loop network.0. and is beneficial to routing. and is used to uniquely define the TE tunnel. In traffic engineering. such a group of LSP tunnels are referred to as TE tunnels. The other is the LSP ID carried by the SENDER_TEMPLATE or FILTER_SPEC object. This solves the problem that data cannot be normally forwarded in a VLAN because in STP/RSTP. The destination address of the multicast packet uses Class D address. Using an algorithm. boards. See network element The main operation interface. and ports on a per-NE basis. In this case. that is.OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Commissioning Guide (U2000) B Glossary MPLS TE tunnel In the case of reroute deployment. only one spanning tree corresponds to all the VLANs. Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. of the NMS. A function.

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Commissioning Guide (U2000) B Glossary network element A network element (NE) contains both the hardware and the software running on it. a node does not always mean a device. The next router to which a packet is sent from any given router as it traverses a network on its journey to its final destination. hierarchical interior gateway protocol (IGP) for network routing. The node cannot be a merge point. For a device with a single frame.. 229 . A link state database is constructed of the network topology which is identical on all routers in the area. System network service access A network address defined by ISO. The NE software runs on the SCC board. and the bypass tunnel should also be able to protect the downstream link that is involved in the working tunnel and adjacent to the PLR. One NE is at least equipped with one system control and communication(SCC) board which manages and monitors the entire network element. For a device with multiple frames. It uses cost as its routing metric. through which entities on the network layer can point access OSI network services. one node stands for one frame of the device. A network element whose communication with the NM application layer must be transferred by the gateway network element application layer. A parameter of the FRR protection. open shortest path first A link-state. one node stands for one device. network to network interface next hop NLP NMS NNI node An internal interface within a network linking two or more elements. Network Management A system in charge of the operation. administration and maintenance See optical distribution frame See outdoor unit Operation and maintenance A local repair method in which a backup tunnel is separately created for each protected tunnel at a PLR. Therefore. normal link pulse See Network Management System See network to network interface A node stands for a managed device in the network. Ltd. and maintenance of a network. Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. It indicates that the bypass tunnel should be able to protect the downstream node that is involved in the working tunnel and adjacent to the PLR. Dijkstra's algorithm is used to calculate the shortest path tree. See non-gateway network element See network service access point not stop forwarding Node Protection non-gateway network element non-GNE NSAP NSF O OAM ODF ODU OM One-to-One Backup See operation. administration.

operation. optical source or receive unit. but not limited to. It implements frequency conversion and amplification for RF signals. in which the communications process is organized into seven different categories that are placed in a layered sequence based on their relationship to the user. See peak burst size See printed circuit board PBS PCB Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. A connector can either connect two fiber ends or connect a fiber end and an optical source (or a detector). and repairs that are intended to eliminate faults and keep a segment in an operational state and support activities required to provide the services of a subscriber access network to users/subscribers. A group of network support functions that monitor and sustain segment operation. a user can test the performance of a network path between a device port and an IP address. The ranger of optical energy level of output signals. It is used to couple the optical wave to the fiber when connected to another device of the same type.. A device installed at the end of a fiber. administration and maintenance optic fiber connector optical distribution frame orderwire OSI OSPF outdoor unit Outloop Output optical power B. Each layer uses the layer immediately below it and provides a service to the layer above. See Open Systems Interconnection See open shortest path first The outdoor unit of the split-structured radio equipment. A case which is used for packing the board or subrack. Layers 7 through 4 deal with end-to-end communication between the message source and destination. activities that are concerned with. failure detection. packet loss ratio or other aspects.5 P-T This section provides the terms starting with letters P to T. Ltd. and layers 3 through 1 deal with network functions. The tested performance may be the path delay.+ A frame which is used to transfer and spool fibers. A performance resource object defined in the network management system.OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Commissioning Guide (U2000) B Glossary Open Systems Interconnection A framework of ISO standards for communication between different systems made by different vendors. By defining a path in the network management system. notification. P packet switched network Packing case Path A telecommunication network which works in packet switching mode. A method of looping back the input signals received at a port to an output port without changing the structure of the signals. A channel that provides voice communication between operation engineers or maintenance engineers of different stations. The left end of a path is a device node whose port needs to be specified and the right end of a path is a certain IP address which can be configured by the user. location. 230 .

231 . if the electric field vector of the electromagnetic wave is parallel to the plane of horizon. It is recommended that this parameter should be not less than the maximum length of the IP packet that might be forwarded. See plesiochronous digital hierarchy See protocol data unit See provider edge A parameter used to define the capacity of token bucket P. this electromagnetic wave is called circularly polarized wave. It refers to the process whereby the outermost label of an MPLS tagged packet is removed by a Label Switched Router (LSR) before the packet is passed to an adjacent Label Edge Router (LER). and 565 Mbit/s rates. provides point-to-point transmission and encapsulates data packets on the network layer.OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Commissioning Guide (U2000) B Glossary PCI bus PDH PDU PE peak burst size PCI (Peripheral Component Interconnect) bus. and best-effort (BE). This parameter must be larger than 0. Specifically. this electromagnetic wave is called horizontal polarized wave. peak information rate penultimate hop popping per-hop behavior PHB PHP PIR PLA plesiochronous digital hierarchy Point-to-Point Protocol A protocol on the data link layer. traffic scheduling and policing. See Point-to-Point Protocol See priority queue See pseudo random binary sequence primary reference clock Power box PPP PQ PRBS PRC Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. if the electric field vector of the electromagnetic wave is perpendicular to the plane of horizon. at a fixed point in space. the IETF defines four types of PHB.. based on the value of DSCP. Penultimate Hop Popping (PHP) is a function performed by certain routers in an MPLS enabled network. Ltd. that is. At present. 34 Mbit/s. whose value should be not less than the committed information rate. 140 Mbit/s. describes a circle. which supplies power for the subracks in the cabinet. A direct current power distribution box at the upper part of a cabinet. expedited forwarding (EF). It multiplexes the minimum rate 64 kit/s into the 2 Mbit/s. if the tip of the electric field vector. assured forwarding (AF). expansion boards. A traffic parameter. the maximum burst IP packet size when the information is transferred at the peak information rate. such as. this electromagnetic wave is called vertically polarized wave. the direction of whose electric field vector is fixed or rotates regularly. A device in the network should select the proper PHB behaviors. and processor/memory subsystems. 32-bit or 64-bit for interconnecting chips. expressed in bit/s. It is located in layer 2 of the IP protocol stack. A high performance bus. polarization A kind of electromagnetic wave. They are class selector (CS). IETF Diff-Serv workgroup defines forwarding behaviors of network nodes as per-hop behaviors (PHB). See per-hop behavior See penultimate hop popping See peak information rate physical link aggregation A multiplexing scheme of bit stuffing and byte interleaving.

PWE3 also emulates the essential attributes of low speed Time Division Multiplexed (TDM) circuit and SONET/SDH. A PE is responsible for VPN user management. pseudo wire emulation A type of end-to-end Layer 2 transmitting technology. It is also called the fourth period or 4-phase PSK or 4-PSK. The simulation approximates to the real situation. similar to real random sequences. and exchange of routing information between sites of the same VPN. or traces. The packet carries two layers of tags to travel through the backbone network of the carrier.OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Commissioning Guide (U2000) B Glossary printed circuit board A board used to mechanically support and electrically connect electronic components using conductive pathways. each QPSK character can perform twobit coding and display the codes in Gray code on graph with the minimum BER. QPSK uses four dots in the star diagram. priority queue protection ground cable Protection path protocol data unit provider edge pseudo random binary A sequence that is random in a sense that the value of an element is independent of the sequence values of any of the other elements. A PE can be a UPE.. the layer 2 virtual private network (VPN) is provided for the user. Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. It encapsulates the tag of the user's private virtual local area network (VLAN) into the tag of the public VLAN.1Q encapsulation. pseudo wire An emulated connection between two PEs for transmitting frames. Usually. and return it (also known as "PopElement(Off)". FR or Ethernet in a Packet Switched Network (PSN). establishment of LSPs between PEs. An abstract data type in computer programming that supports the following three operations: (1) InsertWithPriority: add an element to the queue with an associated priority (2) GetNext: remove the element from the queue that has the highest priority. On these phases. a PE performs the mapping and forwarding of packets between the private network and the public channel. PSN PTN PW PWE3 See packet switched network packet transport network See pseudo wire See pseudo wire emulation edge-to-edge Q QinQ A layer 2 tunnel protocol based on IEEE 802. In this manner. or "GetMinimum") (3) PeekAtNext (optional): look at the element with highest priority without removing it A cable which connects the equipment and the protection ground bar. while the other half is green. The PW is established and maintained by PEs through signaling protocols. one half of the cable is yellow. See quality of service See quadrature phase shift keying QoS QPSK quadrature phase shift A modulation method of data transmission through the conversion or modulation and keying the phase determination of the reference signals (carrier). It emulates the essential attributes edge-to-edge of a telecommunication service such as ATM. tracks. The four dots are evenly distributed on a circle. A specific path that is part of a protection group and is labeled protection. During the process. A device that is located in the backbone network of the MPLS VPN structure. Ltd. It is a data packet at the network layer of the OSI model. or an NPE. The status information of a PW is maintained by the two end PEs of a PW. etched from copper sheets laminated onto a non-conductive substrate. 232 . an SPE.

Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol RDI received signal level Received Signal Strength Indicator Receiver Sensitivity RED Reed-Solomon-Code An evolution of the Spanning Tree Protocol. bit error ratio. and signal-to-noise ratio. radio network controller random early detection A packet loss algorithm used in congestion avoidance. See random early detection A forward error correction code located before interleaving that enables correction of errors induced by burst noise. RFCs can be obtained from sources such as InterNIC..OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Commissioning Guide (U2000) B Glossary quality of service A commonly-used performance indicator of a telecommunication system or channel. it may relate to jitter. It is the abbreviation of high-frequency AC electromagnetic wave. It discards the packet according to the specified higher limit and lower limit of a queue so that global TCP synchronization resulted in traditional Tail-Drop can be prevented. Widely used error correction scheme to fight transmission errors at the receiver site. Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. providing for faster spanning tree convergence after a topology change. RF can be classified into such high-frequency current. The RSTP protocol is backward compatible with the STP protocol. See remote error indication A signal transmitted at the first opportunity in the outgoing direction when a terminal detects specific defects in the incoming signal. including thermal noise and noise generated in the receiver. The AC with frequency higher than 10 kHz is called high-frequency current. Depending on the specific system and service. It functions to measure the quality of the transmission system and the effectiveness of the services. R radio frequency A type of electric current in the wireless network using AC antennas to create an electromagnetic field. The RFC is actually issued. 233 . REI remote defect indication remote error indication A remote error indication (REI) is sent upstream to signal an error condition. within the bandwidth defined by the receiver pulse shaping filter. Ltd. packet loss ratio. under the control of the IAB. Remote error indication path (REI-P) is sent to the upstream PTE when errors are detected in the B3 byte. A device in the RNS which is in charge of controlling the use and the integrity of the radio resources. as well as the capability of a service provider to meet the demands of users. There are two types of REI alarms: Remote error indication line (REI-L) is sent to the upstream LTE when errors are detected in the B2 byte. The reference point for the measurement shall be the antenna Receiver sensitivity is defined as the minimum acceptable value of average received power at point R to achieve a 1 x 10-12 BER (The FEC is open). or other information pertaining to the operation of the Internet is published. for TDD within a specified timeslot. a protocol. The AC with the frequency lower than 1 kHz is called low-frequency current. after discussion and serves as the standard. The received wide band power. delay. Request For Comments A document in which a standard. See remote defect indication The signal level at a receiver input terminal.

A router relies on the destination address and on the information in the table that gives the possible routes--in hops or in number of jumps--between itself. destination address. Routing tables are updated frequently as new information is available. In a TCP/ IP network. the receive end sends signals to ask the transmit end to slow down the transmission rate.. A traffic control method. A route is the path that network traffic takes from its source to its destination. The SMSC delivers an SM to the designated account according to the information set in the route table. Ltd. each IP packet is routed independently. A table that stores and updates the locations (addresses) of network devices. RSVP does not transport application data. Some lower-level alarms always accompany a root alarm. RIP is a distance vector protocol that routinely broadcasts routing information to its neighboring routers and is known to waste bandwidth. A simple routing protocol that is part of the TCP/IP protocol suite. A mapping table that stores the relationship between the original address. short message (SM) protocol type and account. when detecting that the transmit end transmits a large volume of traffic. See received signal level See Received Signal Strength Indicator See Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol See Resource Reservation Protocol radio transmission node reverse pressure RF RFC RIP RMON RMON RNC Root alarm route route table Routing Information Protocol routing table RSL RSSI RSTP RSVP RTN S SD SDH SEMF See space diversity See synchronous digital hierarchy See synchronous equipment management function Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. 234 . See radio frequency See Request For Comments See Routing Information Protocol remote network monitoring remote network monitoring See radio network controller An alarm directly caused by anomaly events or faults in the network. however. Routes can change dynamically.OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Commissioning Guide (U2000) B Glossary Resource Reservation Protocol The Resource Reservation Protocol (RSVP) is designed for Integrated Service and is used to reserve resources on every node along a path. RSVP is a network control protocol like Internet Control Message Protocol (ICMP). Routers regularly share routing table information to be up to date. In telecommunication. and the destination. It determines a route based on the smallest hop count between source and destination. intervening routers. RSVP operates on the transport layer.

A network management protocol of TCP/IP. SNR is expressed as 10 times the logarithm of the power ratio and is usually expressed in dB (Decibel). Ltd. between two points. See service level agreement See Service Level Agreement * To divide data into the information units proper for transmission. SES Setup Priority severely errored second A one-second period which has a bit error ratio ≥ X 10-3 or at least one defect. 235 . which is used to place nuts so as to fix the cabinet. Time interval of one second during which a given digital signal is received with an error ratio greater than 1 X 10 -3 (Rec. and other non-subscriber signal cable. According to SNMP.OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Commissioning Guide (U2000) B Glossary service level agreement A service contract between a customer and a service provider that specifies the forwarding service a customer should receive. It is used to determine whether the tunnel can preempt the resources required by other backup tunnels. Common signal cables cover the E1 cable. agents. A signal that indicates the associated data has failed in the sense that a near-end defect condition (non-degrade defect) is active. The ratio of the amplitude of the desired signal to the amplitude of noise signals at a given point in time. ITU R F. It enables remote users to view and modify the management information of a network element.. quantifiable information about measuring and evaluating the delivery of services. It also provides specific. network cable. See subnetwork connection Simple Network Management Protocol simplex SLA SLA* Slicing small form-factor pluggable SNC Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. This protocol ensures the transmission of management information between any two points. It protects the service provider and customer and allows the service provider to provide evidence that it has achieved the documented target measure. 592 needs correction). Control information about each device is maintained by a management information block. but not simultaneously. Designating or pertaining to a method of operation in which information can be transmitted in either direction. A customer may be a user organization (source domain) or another differentiated services domain (upstream domain). A SLA may include traffic conditioning rules which constitute a traffic conditioning agreement as a whole or partially. ranging from 0 (indicates the highest priority) to 7. which can be hardware as well as software. A specification for a new generation of optical modular transceivers. See severely errored second The priority of the tunnel with respect to obtaining resources. SF SFP side trough signal cable signal fail signal to noise ratio See signal fail See small form-factor pluggable The trough on the side of the cable rack. The SLA details the specific operating and support requirements for each service provided. The polling mechanism is adopted to provide basic function sets. Service Level Agreement * A management-documented agreement that defines the relationship between service provider and its customer. can monitor the activities of various devices on the network and report these activities to the network console workstation.

A sub-network planning can better the organization of a network view. to make better use of available bandwidth and allow more devices to be connected than with other multiplexing techniques. on the other hand. A sub-network can contain NEs and other sub-networks. it helps the network management personnel focus on the equipment under their management. subnet mask subnetwork connection A "transport entity" that transfers information across a subnetwork. only receive SD is used. Compare with TDM. a sub-network is used to contain the equipment located in adjacent regions and closely related with one another.OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Commissioning Guide (U2000) B Glossary SNCP SNMP SNR space diversity See subnetwork connection protection See Simple Network Management Protocol See signal to noise ratio A diversity scheme that enables two or more antennas separated by a specific distance to transmit/receive the same signal and selection is then performed between the two signals to ease the impact of fading. The subnet mask is a binary pattern that is stored in the client machine. it is formed by the association of "ports" on the boundary of the subnetwork. SVC switch See static virtual circuit To filter. The technique used by the IP protocol to determine which network segment packets are destined for. the view space can be saved. server or router and is matched with the IP address. On the one hand. or if its performance falls below a required level. For example. Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. STM STM-1 STM-N STP sub-network See Synchronous Transport Module See synchronous transport mode-1 See synchronous transport module of order N See Spanning Tree Protocol Sub-network is the logical entity in the transmission network and comprises a group of network management objects. subnetwork connection A function. A static implementation of MPLS L2VPN that transfers L2VPN information by manual configuration of VC labels. STP applies to the redundant network to block some undesirable redundant paths through certain algorithms and prune a loop network into a loop-free tree network. The U2000 supports multilevels of sub-networks. Generally. This behavior operates at the data link layer of the OSI model. Currently. and it is indicated with a sub-network icon on a topological view. which allows a working subnetwork connection to be replaced by a protection protection subnetwork connection if the working subnetwork connection fails. Statistical multiplexing A multiplexing technique whereby information from multiple logical channels can be transmitted across a single physical channel. SSM static virtual circuit See Synchronization Status Message Static virtual circuit. Spanning Tree Protocol STP is a protocol that is used in the LAN to remove the loop. instead of by a signaling protocol. It dynamically allocates bandwidth only to active input channels. forward frames based on label or the destination address of each frame.. Ltd. 236 . clock subnet and so on. The network that consists of a group of interconnected or correlated NEs. according to different functions. protection subnet.

STM capacities for N = 4. Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. or converting to holdoff. 16 and 64. An architecture for management. and interface code. 4. maintenance. When a packet drop occurs. connection-based protocols such as TCP slow down their transmission rates in an attempt to let queued packets be serviced. When a queue within a network router reaches its maximum length. SDH is suitable for the fiber communication system with high speed and a large capacity since it uses synchronous multiplexing and flexible mapping structure. Higher capacity STMs are formed at rates equivalent to N times this basic rate. transmission rate level.OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Commissioning Guide (U2000) B Glossary Synchronization Status A message that carries quality levels of timing signals on a synchronous timing link. such as tracing. It consists of information payload and Section Overhead (SOH) information fields organized in a block frame structure which repeats every 125. module of order N T tail drop A type of QoS. including planning. See ITU-T Recommendation G. A congestion management mechanism.707. 707 for STM modules of order 1. installation. and the line coding of scrambling is used only for signals. synchronous transport A STM-N is the information structure used to support section layer connections in SDH. SDH is an important part of ISDN and BISDN..709. higher values are under consideration. operation and administration of telecommunications equipment. provisioning. tag control information See Transmission Control Protocol See time division multiplexing See traffic engineering See traffic engineering database Tail drop TCI TCP TDM TE TEDB Telecommunication A protocol model defined by ITU-T for managing open systems in a communications Management Network network. switching. networks and services. Ltd. This is termed STM-1. in which packets arrive later are discarded when the queue is full.708. mode-1 Synchronous Transport Module An STM is the information structure used to support section layer connections in the SDH. synchronous digital hierarchy A transmission scheme that follows ITU-T G. It interleaves the bytes of low-speed signals to multiplex the signals to high-speed counterparts. Message Nodes on an SDH network and a synchronization network acquire upstream clock information through this message. synchronous equipment management function synchronous transport Synchronous Transfer Mode at 155 Mbit/s. 237 . N = 16 and N = 64 are defined. It defines the transmission features of digital signals such as frame structure. The SEMF converts performance data and implementation specific hardware alarms into object-oriented messages for transmission over DCCs and/or a Q interface. This policy of discarding packets may result in network-wide synchronization due to the TCP slow startup mechanism. The information is suitably conditioned for serial transmission on the selected media at a rate which is synchronized to the network. and G. G. This is also known as tail drop because packets are dropped from the input end (tail) of the queue. multiplexing mode. Then the nodes can perform proper operations on their clocks. thereby letting the queue empty. and forward the synchronization information to downstream nodes. A basic STM is defined at 155 520 kbit/s. packet drops can occur.

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Commissioning Guide (U2000) B Glossary TIM time division multiplexing trace identifier mismatch A multiplexing technology. and to optimize the utilization of network resources. forming multiple multiplexing digital signals to be transmitted over one channel. The purpose is to prevent the congestion caused by unbalanced loads. which uses the link state algorithm. See Telecommunication Management Network A ToS sub-field (the bits 0 to 2 in the ToS field) in the ToS field of the IP packet header.). Every router collects the information about TE of every links in its area and generates TE DataBase. Tributary protection switching. The TTL is set by the sender to the maximum time the packet is allowed to be in the network. to adjust in real time the parameters such as traffic management parameters. TEDB is the abbreviation of the traffic engineering database. 3. Each router in the network decrements the TTL field when the packet arrives. See tributary protection switch A technology that is used to dynamically monitor the traffic of the network and the load of the network elements. avoiding packet loss and congestion. TDM divides the sampling cycle of a channel into time slots (TSn. 1. TEDB is the base of forming the dynamic TE path in the MPLS TE network. such as OSPF and IS-IS. 2.. A technique used in best-effort delivery systems to prevent packets that loop endlessly. reliable protocol (reliable in the sense of ensuring error-free delivery). MPLS TE needs to know the features of the dynamic TE of every links by expanding the current IGP. It actively adjusts the output speed of traffic in the scenario that the traffic matches network resources provided by the lower layer devices. . A connection-oriented. a function provided by the equipment. It is a way of controlling the network traffic from a computer to optimize or guarantee the performance and minimize the delay. See two rate three color marker See time to live tributary unit A channel on the packet switching network that transmits service traffic between PEs. The tunnel ensures secure and transparent transmission of VPN information. is intended to protect N tributary processing boards through a standby tributary processing board. a tunnel is an information transmission channel between two entities. The maximum reserved bandwidth of the link and the unreserved bandwidth of every link with priority are rather important. and the reassembly and verification of the complete messages from packets received by IP. TCP corresponds to the transport layer in the ISO/OSI reference model. The expanded OSPF and IS-IS contain some TE features. route parameters and resource restriction parameters. In VPN. time to live TMN ToS priority TPS traffic engineering traffic engineering database Traffic shaping Transmission Control Protocol tributary protection switch trTCM TTL TU Tunnel Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. and the sampling value codes of multiple signals engross time slots in a certain order. 238 . The protocol within TCP/IP that governs the breakup of data messages into packets to be sent via IP (Internet Protocol). such as the link bandwidth and color. n=0. Ltd. In most cases. a tunnel is an MPLS tunnel... and discards any packet if the TTL counter reaches zero.

The configuration data then covers the configuration data stored at the NMS side. Unlike a permanent CBR (Constant Bit Rate) channel. V V-UNI variable bit rate See virtual user-network interface One of the traffic classes used by ATM (Asynchronous Transfer Mode). Therefore. U U-VLAN UAS UBR UDP underfloor cabling UNI unicast unspecified bit rate A VLAN attribute indicating that the current VLAN is a user VLAN of an M-VLAN. and no feedback or request for slowing down the data rate is delivered to the sender. or red. unavailable second See unspecified bit rate See User Datagram Protocol The cables connected cabinets and other devices are routed underfloor. upload User Datagram Protocol user network interface The interface between user equipment and private or public network equipment (for example. Multicast services are copied from the M-VLAN to the user VLAN. A packet is marked red if it exceeds the PIR. A TCP/IP standard protocol that allows an application program on one device to send a datagram to an application program on another. No feedback to congestion. See variable bit rate See virtual container Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. UDP is used to try to transmit the data packet. duplicated. delayed. ATM switches). or delivered out of order. 239 VBR VC Issue 01 (2011-10-30) .OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Commissioning Guide (U2000) B Glossary two rate three color marker The trTCM meters an IP packet stream and marks its packets based on two rates. and their associated burst sizes to be either green. Peak Information Rate (PIR) and Committed Information Rate (CIR). In case of congestion. yellow. a VBR data stream varies in bandwidth and is better suited to non real time transfers than to real-time streams such as voice calls. UBR cells are discarded. This type of service is ideal for the transmission of IP datagrams.. the destination device does not actively confirm whether the correct data packet is received. Otherwise it is marked either yellow or green depending on whether it exceeds or doesn't exceed the CIR.6 U-Z This section provides the terms starting with letters U to Z. No commitment to transmission. B. User Datagram Protocol (UDP) uses IP to deliver datagrams. UDP provides application programs with the unreliable connectionless packet delivery service. See user network interface The process of sending data from a source to a single recipient. UDP messages can be lost. An operation to report some or all configuration data of an NE to the NMS(Network Management system). Ltd. that is.

The field in the Asynchronous Transfer Mode (ATM) cell header that identifies to which virtual path the cell belongs. A group of co-located member trail termination functions that are connected to the same virtual concatenation link The information structure used to support path layer connections in the SDH. A type of point-to-multipoint L2VPN service provided over the public network. the L3 interfaces of the device are distributed to different VRFs. works as an action point to perform service classification and traffic control in HQoS. virtual route forward VRF performs the function of establishing multiple virtual routing devices on one actual routing device. A logical grouping of two or more nodes which are not necessarily on the same physical network segment but which share the same IP network number. virtual local area network virtual path identifier virtual private LAN service virtual private network A system configuration.OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Commissioning Guide (U2000) B Glossary VCC VCG VCI VCTRUNK virtual channel connection virtual channel identifier virtual concatenation group virtual container See virtual channel connection See virtual concatenation group See virtual channel identifier A virtual concatenation group applied in data service mapping. where the subscriber is able to build a private network via connections to different network switches that may include private network capabilities. A logical grouping of multiple virtual channel connections into one virtual connection. That is. performing the function of establishing multiple virtual route forwarding instances on the device. Ltd. See virtual local area network An IP telephony term for a set of facilities used to manage the delivery of voice information over the Internet. The VCI. VoIP involves sending voice information in a digital form in discrete packets rather than by using the traditional circuit-committed protocols of the public switched telephone network (PSTN). 240 . It consists of information payload and path Overhead (POH) information fields organized in a block frame structure which repeats every 125 or 500 μs. A 16-bit field in the header of an ATM cell. This is often associated with switched Ethernet. together with the VPI. VPLS enables geographically isolated user sites to communicate with each other through the MAN/WAN as if they are on the same LAN. is used to identify the next destination of a cell as it passes through a series of ATM switches on its way to its destination. A virtual user-network interface.. also called the internal port of a data service processing board The VC logical trail that carries data between two end points in an ATM network. See voice over IP See virtual path identifier See virtual private LAN service See virtual private network See virtual route forward virtual user-network interface VLAN voice over IP VoIP VPI VPLS VPN VRF Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co.

such as a province. It can prevent the global TCP detection synchronization caused by traditional tail-drop. packets of all priority queues can be scheduled.. which is located on the NE management layer of the transport network A fair queue scheduling algorithm based on bandwidth allocation weights.OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Commissioning Guide (U2000) B Glossary W wait to restore WAN Web LCT weighted fair queuing The number of minutes to wait before services are switched back to the working line. WAN covers a broad area. See weighted random early detection See weighted round Robin See wait to restore winding pipe WRED WRR WTR X XPIC See cross polarization interference cancellation Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. A tool for fiber routing. 241 . according to their weights and schedules the queues cyclically. weighted random early A packet loss algorithm used for congestion avoidance. a state or even a country. See wide area network The local maintenance terminal of a transport network. This scheduling algorithm allocates the total bandwidth of an interface to queues. WRED is favorable for the high-priority packet when calculating the packet loss ratio. In this manner. weighted round Robin N/A WFQ wide area network See weighted fair queuing A network composed of computers which are far away from each other which are physically connected through specific protocols. Ltd. which acts as the corrugated pipe.

Sign up to vote on this title
UsefulNot useful